Xerox C55 DocuPrint Installation guide


Add to my manuals
395 Pages

advertisement

Xerox C55 DocuPrint Installation guide | Manualzz

NEXT

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 2

Document Introduction

Purpose of this Document

The purpose of this Technical Information Guide is to serve the informational needs of Systems Administrators with an electronic reference. It provides necessary information on your DocuPrint printer for platform-specific network setup, configuration setup or change, maintenance, move, and optional hardware installation. Users may access reference information either electronically through hyper-linked topics, or by printing chapter-by-chapter hard copies. Software-related information is organized in platform-specific chapters.

Purpose of this Section

The purpose of this introductory section is to give a brief overview of the network installation process, and to provide a guide to the information contained in this Technical Information Guide, as well as a jump off point for locating the information you seek.

Objective

Using the information contained in this document, Systems Administrators will be able to connect the DocuPrint printer to their network, configure the printer for optimum printing performance, and troubleshoot a variety of printer problems.

Requirements

To correctly install and configure your printer on a network, based on the information in this document you will need:

A DocuPrint C55 or C55mp printer with an installed network interface.

A Windows, Macintosh, UNIX or OS/2 workstation with appropriate operating system software installed.

A working knowledge of your operating system and your network topology.

NEXT

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 3

How Can I Print This?

Printing individual chapters in hard copy form must be accomplished with the

Print

command in the

File

drop-down menu of Adobe Acrobat Reader.

To print a chapter, simply click your mouse on the

File

drop-down menu and select

Print

.

You may get Help on operating the Adobe Acrobat Reader application at any time by clicking the

Help

drop-down menu and selecting

Acrobat

Reader Help

, or by pressing the

F1

key on your keyboard.

How do I find what I want?

The Adobe Acrobat Reader on your DocuPrint C55 CD-ROM comes with a fast and thorough search engine. Complete and detailed instructions on how to use this search engine are available in the Adobe Acrobat Reader

Online Guide. You can access this Guide from the

Help

menu.

If you have a previously installed version of Acrobat you can verify it contains the search engine by clicking on the

Tools

menu and check the bottom menu entry. If there is a

Search

entry you can use this version. If the entry does not exist, install the search engine version supplied in the

\instal\ utility\acroread

directory of your DocuPrint C55 CD-ROM.

The procedure below should be used to set up the search index for the

DocuPrint C55 Technical Information Guide.

1.

Start the Adobe Acrobat Reader on your workstation.

2.

Click on the

Tools

menu and select

Search

. A fold out menu will appear, select

Indexes

.

NEXT

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 4

3.

The

Index Selection

dialog will display a list of indexes currently configured. Click

Add>>.

4.

The

Add Index

dialog will appear. On the right side of the dialog select the directory where you installed your DocuPrint C55 Technical

Information Guide. The file

INDEX.PDX

will be displayed in the left side of the dialog.

5.

Select

INDEX.PDX

and click

OK

. The Index Selection dialog will show the

DocuPrint C55

entry. Be sure this entry is checked and click

OK

.

6.

You may now search using the Tools menu or the search icon for any word or phrase to find the information you want.

NEXT

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 5

Other Information Resources

This Technical Information Guide complements use of the Quick

Installation Poster and the User’s Guide.

The Quick Installation Poster explains procedures for physically setting up the printer.

The DocuPrint Quick Network Install Guide provides an outline of the network setup process for an “As Soon As Possible” installation.

The User’s Guide explains all procedures related to routine printer maintenance and day-to-day use.

This Technical Information Guide provides more detailed procedures for establishing a physical printer network connection, information on establishing network printing by platform, and provides procedures for tasks typically performed by a Systems Administrator.

Electronic Help is available for installation of software, CentreWare

DP, and all print drivers supplied with your DocuPrint C55/C55mp printer.

NEXT

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 1

Table of Contents – Document Overview

First Time Printer Setup

Connecting to your Network

-

provides instruction on installing the

Network Interface Card and cabling your printer to the network.

Novell NetWare Setup

contains Software Installation and Troubleshooting information for NetWare versions 3.1X and 4.1X.

Windows Peer to Peer Network Setup

contains Software Installation and

Troubleshooting information for the various Windows versions

Macintosh Network Setup

contains Software Installation and

Troubleshooting information for the Macintosh.

UNIX Network Setup

contains Software Installation and Troubleshooting information for the various supported UNIX platforms

OS/2 Network Setup

contains Software Installation and Troubleshooting information for the OS/2 operating system.

Configuration of an Existing Printer

CentreWare DP Software Instructions

provides instruction on tasks typically performed by the Systems Administrator using the CentreWare DP application

DocuPrint C55/C55mp Control Panel

provides instruction for using the

Control Panel and includes tables of complete menu and submenu information.

Internet Printing Services

- provides instruction for using a web browser for such tasks as monitoring the status of your printer and submitting print jobs.

Maintenance of Your Printer

Administrative Maintenance

provides instructions for printer cleaning, as well as important information in case you ever need to move your DocuPrint printer.

Error Codes

provides a complete list of all error codes displayed on the printer’s Control Panel.

Installation of Printer Options

Optional Hardware

contains reprints of the installation instructions for all

DocuPrint options (Media Server, Hard Drive, Memory Upgrades, etc.).

Click here for the Hot Index

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 2

Technical Information Guide Hot Index

Chapter Two Connecting to your Network

CHAPTER INTRODUCTION

ORGANIZATION

QUICK STEPS FOR CONNECTION & SETUP

INSTALLATION OF THE NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC)

NETWORK CABLE CONNECTION

ETHERNET/ETHERTALK NETWORK CARD LED DESCRIPTIONS

TOKEN RING/TOKENTALK NETWORK CARD LED DESCRIPTIONS

Set An IP Address

Static Addressing

Dynamic Addressing (RARP/BOOTP)

Dynamic Addressing (DHCP)

SETTING A SUBNET MASK AT THE CONTROL PANEL

SETTING UP APPSOCKET

SETTING DEFAULT GATEWAY AT THE CONTROL PANEL

PRINT THE PRINT SETTINGS PAGE

WHERE DO I GO FROM HERE?

Chapter Three...Novell NetWare Setup

I N T R O D U C T I O N 3

CHAPTER INTRODUCTION

NETWARE 3.1X PRINT SERVER SETUP WITH SETUP WIZARD

Procedure

ADVANCED SETUP IN BINDERY MODE

NETWARE 4.1X (NDS) PRINT SERVER SETUP WITH SETUP WIZARD

ADVANCED SETUP FOR NDS (NETWARE DIRECTORY SERVICES) NETWORK

NETWARE TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

NETWARE TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK CHECK

NOVELL NETWARE TROUBLESHOOTING STEP-BY-STEP

Overview

Novell NetWare Hardware Step-by-Step

Novell NetWare Software Step-by-Step

I N T R O D U C T I O N 4

Chapter Four...Windows Peer-to-Peer Network Setup

CHAPTER INTRODUCTION

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

SOFTWARE INSTALL FOR WINDOWS 3.X, WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS, & NT

3.5 (3.51)

SOFTWARE INSTALL FOR WINDOWS 95 AND NT 4.0

WINDOWS 95 PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK

REQUIREMENTS

STEP-BY-STEP SETUP (PEER-TO-PEER, NETBEUI)

WINDOWS NT 3.51 PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK

REQUIREMENTS

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (TCP/IP PROTOCOL)

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (DLC/LLC PROTOCOL)

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (APPLETALK PROTOCOL)

WINDOWS NT 4.1X NETWORK

INTRODUCTION

PRELIMINARY STEPS

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (TCP/IP PROTOCOL)

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (DLC/LLC PROTOCOL)

QUICK INSTALL STEPS (APPLETALK PROTOCOL)

WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK

REQUIREMENTS

STEP-BY-STEP SETUP (PEER-TO-PEER, NETBEUI)

I N T R O D U C T I O N 5

WINDOWS TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

WINDOWS (ALL VERSIONS) QUICK CHECK

WINDOWS 95 TROUBLESHOOTING

WINDOWS NT 3.5X TROUBLESHOOTING (TCP/IP PROTOCOL)

WINDOWS NT 3.5X TROUBLESHOOTING (DLC/LLC PROTOCOL)

WINDOWS NT 3.5X TROUBLESHOOTING (APPLETALK PROTOCOL)

WINDOWS NT 4.0 TROUBLESHOOTING (TCP/IP)

WINDOWS NT 4.0 TROUBLESHOOTING (DLC/LLC)

WINDOWS NT 4.0 TROUBLESHOOTING (APPLETALK)

I N T R O D U C T I O N 6

Chapter Five...Macintosh Network Setup

INTRODUCTION

QUICK STEP OVERVIEW

MACINTOSH SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

INTRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

DocuPrint Software Installation for Macintosh System 7.X

STEP-BY-STEP SETUP (APPLETALK)

MACINTOSH TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

MACINTOSH QUICK CHECK

MACINTOSH TROUBLESHOOTING STEP-BY-STEP

Chapter Six...UNIX Network Setup

INTRODUCTION

QUICK STEP OVERVIEW

UNIX SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

SOLARIS 1.1X , 2.X STEP-BY-STEP SETUP

OTHER UNIX VERSIONS QUICK STEP OVERVIEW

OTHER UNIX VERSIONS STEP-BY-STEP SETUP

PRINT QUEUE MANAGEMENT

PRINTING MODEL: WORKSTATION TO PRINTER

PRINTING MODEL: WORKSTATION TO PRINT SERVER

PRINTING MODEL: PRINT SERVER TO PRINTER

DOCUPRINT UNIX COMMAND LINE UTILITIES

REMOVING A DOCUPRINT PRINTER

ADMINISTRATION

DOCUPRINT PARAMETERS CONFIGURABLE VIA TELNET

TO USE TELNET

THE TELNET CONSOLE MAIN MENU

REMOTE NIC CONFIGURATION

TELNET MENU SYSTEM (EXPLODED)

UNIX TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION

UNIX TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK CHECK

UNIX TROUBLESHOOTING STEP-BY-STEP

I N T R O D U C T I O N 7

Chapter Seven...OS/2 Network Setup

CHAPTER INTRODUCTION

COMPATIBILITY

QUICK STEP (OS/2 WARP SERVER V 4.0)

Quick Install Setup

Troubleshooting

STEP-BY-STEP SETUP FOR IBM TCP/IP FOR OS/2

TCP/IP Protocol Configuration

OS/2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

INSTALLING THE DOCUPRINT OS/2 PRINT DRIVER

OS/2 TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

OS/2 QUICK CHECK

TCP/IP for OS/2 versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0

OS/2 TROUBLESHOOTING STEP-BY-STEP

I N T R O D U C T I O N 8

I N T R O D U C T I O N 9

Chapter Eight...CentreWare DP Software Instructions

INTRODUCTION

KEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS OF CENTREWARE DP

PRINTER INSTALL WITH SETUP WIZARD

INTRODUCTION

SETUP WIZARD FOR NDS NETWORKS

SETUP WIZARD FOR BINDERY NETWORKS

CENTREWARE DP FEATURES

MAIN SCREEN OVERVIEW

MAIN SCREEN FEATURES

PRINTER MENU

VIEW MENU

DIAGNOSTICS MENU

TOOLS MENU

HELP MENU

CENTREWARE DRIVER INSTALLER (CDI)

INTRODUCTION

Requirements

HOW TO PLAN YOUR DRIVER DISTRIBUTION STRATEGY

Create/Edit The Login Script

CENTREWARE DRIVER INSTALLER OPERATION

CREATING A FILTER

OVERVIEW

PROCEDURE

ADVANCED SETUP

INTRODUCTION

ADVANCED SETUP IN BINDERY MODE

ADVANCED SETUP FOR NDS NETWORKS

I N T R O D U C T I O N 10

Chapter Nine...Internet Printing Services

CHAPTER INTRODUCTION

CONFIGURE YOUR WEB BROWSER

Procedure

TO INSTALL YOUR INTERNET SERVICES HELP FILES

Web Server installation

Local Hard Drive Installation

INVOKING HELP FROM THE PRINTER

Procedure

INTERNET SERVICES QUICK TOUR

THE HOME PAGE

Buttons

THE PRINT PAGE

Buttons

Controls

THE JOB LOG PAGE

THE STATUS PAGE

Controls

I N T R O D U C T I O N 11

Chapter Ten...DocuPrint C55 Control Panel

INTRODUCTION

CONTROL PANEL DESCRIPTION

CONTROL PANEL INDICATOR LIGHTS

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

HOW TO USE THE CONTROL PANEL

Menu System Navigation

TOP LEVEL MENU OVERVIEW

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - CONTROL

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - MAINTENANCE

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - MEDIA

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - PRINT

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - MULTINATIONAL

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - COMMUNICATIONS

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - SETUP

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - SERVICE

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - IMAGING

CONTROL PANEL MENUS - MEDIA SERVER (OPTIONAL)

Chapter Eleven...Error Codes

INTRODUCTION

C SERIES— PAPER FEED ERRORS

E SERIES— JAM/COMPONENT INTEGRITY ERRORS

F SERIES— MEDIA SERVER ERRORS

H SERIES— HARD DRIVE ERRORS

J SERIES— CONSUMABLES ERRORS

W SERIES— LOW CONSUMABLE/END-OF-USE ERRORS

T SERIES— PRINT HARDWARE ERRORS

U SERIES— PRINT HARDWARE ERRORS

I N T R O D U C T I O N 12

I N T R O D U C T I O N 13

Chapter Twelve...Administrative Maintenance

INTRODUCTION

FORMATTING YOUR HARD DRIVE

CLEANING PROCEDURES

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

PRINTER RELOCATION

PRINTER AND NETWORK CARD UPGRADES

Overview

Platform Independent Methods

Platform Dependant Methods

I N T R O D U C T I O N 14

Chapter Thirteen...Printer Specifications

INTRODUCTION

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

PRINT FEATURE SPECIFICATIONS

CONNECTIVITY SPECIFICATIONS

MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL

SUPPLIES STORAGE SPECIFICATIONS

Chapter Fourteen...Optional Hardware

MEDIA SERVER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

HARD DRIVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

LOWER FEEDER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

SERIAL/LOCALTALK CARD INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

ETHERNET/TOKEN RING CARD INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

ADOBE POSTSCRIPT KIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

I N T R O D U C T I O N 15

Safety Notes

Electrical Safety

Laser Safety

Maintenance Safety

Operational Safety

Ozone Safety

The Xerox C55 color laser printer and the recommended consumable supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements.

Attention to the following notes will ensure the continued safe operation of your printer.

Click here for the Copyright Information

è

I N T R O D U C T I O N 16

Electrical Safety

Use the power cord supplied with your C55 printer.

Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect the printer to a power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection terminal.

Plug the power cable directly into a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Do not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether an outlet is grounded, ask an electrician to check the outlet.

WARNING: You may get a severe electrical shock if you do not connect the grounding conductors correctly.

Do not place the printer where people may step on the power cable.

Do not place objects on the power cable.

Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks.

Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. These openings are provided to prevent overheating of the printer.

WARNING: Do not push objects into slots and openings on the printer.

Making a contact with a voltage point or shorting out a part could result in fire or electrical shock.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 17

If you notice unusual noises or odors, switch off the printer power immediately. Disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.

Call an authorized Xerox service representative to correct the problem.

If any of the following conditions occur, switch off the printer power immediately, disconnect the power cable, and call an authorized Xerox service representative.

– The power cable is damaged or frayed.

– Liquid is spilled into the printer.

– The printer is exposed to water.

– Any part of the printer is damaged.

The power cord is attached to the printer as a plug-in device at the back of the printer. In the event it is necessary to remove all electrical power from the printer, disconnect the power cord from the power receptacle.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 18

Laser Safety

CAUTION: The use of controls or adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in a hazardous radiation exposure.

This equipment complies with all applicable safety standards. With specific regard to laser, the equipment complies with performance standards for laser products set by government agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance.

When performing various operator functions, you may see laser warning labels. These labels are for the service mode and are placed on or near panels or shields that require a tool for removal. These panels are not to be removed.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 19

Maintenance Safety

Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation supplied with your printer.

Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor performance and could create a dangerous condition.

Use the supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this manual.

Keep all of these materials out of the reach of children.

Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws unless you are installing optional equipment. There are no parts that you can maintain or service behind these covers.

Follow the maintenance procedures provided in Chapter 7.

Operational Safety

Your Xerox printer and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards.

Your attention to the following safety guidelines will help to ensure the continued safe operation of your printer.

Use the material and supplies specifically designed for your printer.

The use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance and possibly a hazardous situation.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the printer.

50

°

F to 90

° °

I N T R O D U C T I O N 20

Place the printer in a dust free area where the temperature range is

C to 32

°

C) and the relative humidity is 15% to

85%.

Choose a location for the printer allowing sufficient space around the printer for operation and maintenance. The minimum recommended room size is 10 cubic meters/353 cubic ft. or approximately 8 ft. x 8 ft.

x 8 ft. / 242 cm x 242 cm x 242 cm.

Place the printer in an area where there is adequate space for ventilation and servicing. The recommended minimal spacing is 10 in. (25 cm) behind the printer, 10 in. (25 cm) on either side of the printer, and 24 in. (61 cm) in front of the printer.

Do not place the printer near a heat source.

Do not place the printer in direct sunlight.

Do not place the printer in line with the cold air flow from an air conditioning system.

Place the printer on a level, solid surface with adequate strength for the weight of the machine. The machine weight without any packaging materials is 89 pounds (40 kg).

The printer is heavy. Exercise care in moving or relocating the printer.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 21

Follow the recommended procedure when moving the printer from one location to another.

Do not put containers of coffee or other liquids onto the printer.

Do not block or cover the slots and openings on the printer. Without adequate ventilation, the printer may overheat.

WARNING: Be careful when working in areas identified with this warming symbol. These areas may be very hot and could cause personal injury.

Frequent operation of the on/off switch is not recommended.

Keep hands, hair, and neckties away from the exit feed rollers.

Do not remove a media tray while printing from a single tray configuration.

Do not open the Top Cover while printing.

Do not switch off the printer power while printing.

Do not move the printer while printing.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 22

Ozone Safety

This printer produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is heavier than air, and the quantity is dependent on copy volume.

Providing the proper environmental parameters, as specified in the

Operational Safety section of these Safety Notes, ensures that concentration levels meet safe limits.

If you need additional information about ozone, request the Xerox publication, OZONE, 600P83222, from your Xerox Authorized Reseller or

Xerox Support.

Special Notices

FCC Notices... USA

Certifications... Canadian

European Markets

Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety Approval

I N T R O D U C T I O N 23

I N T R O D U C T I O N 24

FCC Notices… USA

Radio Frequency

BASE PRINTER AND BASE PRINTER WITH ETHERNET

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals, may cause interference with radio communications. The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference, when the equipment is operated in a residential environment. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If the equipment does cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or a experienced radio/TV technician for help.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 25

Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the authority granted by the FCC to operate this equipment.

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.

BASE PRINTER WITH TOKEN RING AND/OR BASE

PRINTER WITH SERIAL/LOCALTALK CARD

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

I N T R O D U C T I O N 26

Certifications… Canadian

60 HZ, 115V

The equipment is listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, UL 1950, certified by Canadian Standards Association, CSA22.2, No. 950

European Markets

CE Certification

The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Xerox Limited

Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable directives of the

European Union as of the dates indicated:

January 1, 1995: - Council Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Council

Directive 93/68/EEC, approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.

January 1, 1996: - Council Directive 89/336/EEC, approximation of the laws of member states related to electromagnetic compatibility.

A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards, can be obtained from your Xerox Limited representative.

Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by

Xerox Corporation may result in non-compliance with one or more of the directives listed above.

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with the EMC directive (89/336/EEC).

I N T R O D U C T I O N 27

Ethernet/Token Ring/Serial/LocalTalk Accessories

WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

EN55022

Configuration

Base Printer

Base Printer with Hard Drive

Base Printer with Media Server

Base Printer with Ethernet

Base Printer with Token Ring

Base Printer with Serial/LocalTalk

I N T R O D U C T I O N 28

Specification

EN55022-B

EN55022-B

EN55022-B

EN55022-A

EN55022-A

EN55022-A

I N T R O D U C T I O N 29

Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety Approval

The C55 printing system is in compliance with various governmental agencies and national safety regulations. All system ports meet the requirements for Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits for connection to customer-owned devices and networks.

Additions of customer-owned or third-party accessories attached to the system must meet or exceed the requirements listed above.

Since this system consists of several modules requiring external connection, it must be installed per the Xerox Installation procedure.

Copyright Information

© 1997 by Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved.

Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and

Information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc.

Xerox

®

, The Document Company

®

, the digitized

X, and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox

Corporation

®

. Product and trademarks of other companies are also acknowledged.

Changes are periodically made to this document.

Changes, technical inaccuracies, and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions.

Technical updates will be included in subsequent editions.

Printed in the United States of America

I N T R O D U C T I O N 30

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

1

Chapter 2

Connecting To Your Network

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

2

Chapter Two Contents

Chapter Introduction..................................................................................................................3

Purpose of this Chapter.........................................................................................................3

Objective ...............................................................................................................................3

Requirements ........................................................................................................................3

Organization ..............................................................................................................................4

Quick Steps For Connection & Setup........................................................................................5

Installation of the Network Interface Card (NIC)........................................................................6

Network Cable Connection........................................................................................................7

Ethernet/EtherTalk Network Card LED Descriptions.................................................................8

Ethernet/EtherTalk Network Interface Card Legend.............................................................8

Token Ring/TokenTalk Network Card LED Descriptions ..........................................................9

Token Ring/TokenTalk Network Interface Card Legend.......................................................9

Set an IP Address....................................................................................................................10

Dynamic Addressing Setup .................................................................................................11

Dynamic Addressing (RARP/BOOTP) ................................................................................12

Dynamic Addressing (DHCP)..............................................................................................12

Static Addressing Setup ......................................................................................................13

Setting a SUBNET MASK at the Control Panel .......................................................................14

Setting DEFAULT GATEWAY at the Control Panel ................................................................15

Setting up APPSOCKET .........................................................................................................16

Print the Print Settings Page....................................................................................................17

Where do I go from here? .......................................................................................................18

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

3

Chapter Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this Connection & Setup chapter is to outline the physical connection and configuration of your DocuPrint printer for use on a network. An experienced Systems Administrator would ordinarily perform this task.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to enable you to:

Identify the overall steps to physically connect and configure your

DocuPrint printer to work with your network.

Install the network interface card if necessary.

Connect network cabling to your DocuPrint printer.

Requirements

In general, the requirements needed for printer connection and setup include:

A network interface card installed in your DocuPrint printer.

Appropriate cabling to link the card to your network.

A working knowledge of your network cabling scheme (for example, coaxial cable; shielded or unshielded twisted pair; RJ45 or DB9 connection).

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

4

Organization

This chapter contains the following sections:

Quick Steps for Connection & Setup

provides the experienced Systems

Administrator with enough information to quickly connect the printer to the network.

Installation of the Network Interface Card (NIC)

is a step-by-step description of the physical installation of the network card.

Network Cable Connection

is a short pictorial orientation of the connector positions on the Ethernet and Token Ring network cards.

Set An IP Address

provides the detailed steps for connecting the printer to a TCP/IP network.

Setting a SUBNET MASK at the Control Panel

provides the detailed steps for setting a security mask on a TCP/IP network.

Setting up APPSOCKET

provides the detailed steps for configuring the printer to use the AppSocket protocol on your network.

Setting DEFAULT GATEWAY at the Control Panel

provides the detailed steps for setting your gateway address.

Print the Print Settings Page

provides the detailed steps for obtaining the current printer settings as well as for verifying that the printer recognizes the network card.

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

5

Quick Steps For Connection & Setup

Quick Steps for printer connection and setup, for use by the experienced

Systems Administrator, are provided within this section.

Quick Steps common to virtually all platforms include:

1.

Install a Network Interface Card within the printer. See details in the section of this chapter entitled

Installation of the Network Interface

Card (NIC)

.

2.

Install cabling to link the Network Interface Card to your network. See details in the section of this chapter entitled

Network Cable

Connection

.

3.

Print a

Print Settings

page from the Control Panel on the DocuPrint printer to determine the printer’s total memory, current Network Card settings, and all current printer settings. See details in the section of this chapter entitled

Print the Printer Settings Page

.

4.

If you are connecting this printer using TCP/IP protocol, refer to the section in this chapter entitled

Set an IP Address

.

5.

Go to the appropriate chapter(s) within this Technical Information

Guide (TIG) covering your workstation Operating System (for example,

Windows; Macintosh; UNIX; OS2

) and follow the setup instructions provided.

6.

If your job doesn’t print correctly, refer to the

Troubleshooting

section within the applicable

Operating System

chapter of this TIG for problem-solving information.

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

6

Installation of the Network Interface Card (NIC)

If you do not already have a factory-installed Network Interface Card

(NIC) in your printer, you MUST install the NIC that is compatible with your network. The installation procedure is the same for the

Ethernet/EtherTalk NIC and the Token Ring/TokenTalk NIC.

1.

Switch the printer OFF.

2.

Loosen the screw and remove the cover from the NIC slot opening at the rear panel of the DocuPrint printer.

3.

While touching the metal surface of the rear panel with one hand, remove the NIC from its anti-static bag with your other hand.

4.

With the bottom of the board facing to the left, position the NIC card in the guides in the NIC slot.

5.

Slide the NIC all the way into the slot until the thumbscrew makes contact with the threaded hole in the back panel. If necessary, use thumb pressure to seat the card within its slot.

6.

Tighten the thumbscrew with your fingers. (DO NOT USE TOOLS.)

7.

Switch the printer ON. Check the lights on the rear of the NIC card. If no lights illuminate within ten seconds, STOP. Switch the printer OFF and attempt to reseat the NIC as described in steps 4 and 5 above.

8.

Use the Control Panel to print a Print Settings page and verify the

Network Interface Card settings. Refer to the page within this chapter entitled

Printing the Print Settings Page

if you need instructions.

9.

Proceed to the page within this chapter entitled

Network Cable

Connection

for cabling instructions.

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

7

Network Cable Connection

The graphics on this page depict the rear panel of the DocuPrint printer with the Network Interface Card already installed. Follow the text for your type of card to make network cabling connections.

ETHERNET CONNECTION

Ethernet connections are made at the rear of the DocuPrint printer on the Network Interface Card.

10BaseT twisted pair connections are made using UTP or STP cable at the RJ-45 (8 pin) connector on the Network Interface Card.

COAX network connections are made with RG-58 cable using a BNC connector to the COAX connector on the Network Interface Card.

TOKEN RING CONNECTIONS

Token Ring connections are made at the rear of the DocuPrint printer on the Network Interface card.

DB-9 connections are made at the rear of the DocuPrint printer on the

9 pin sub-miniature D connector.

Twisted pair connections are made using UTP or STP cable at the RJ-

45 (8 pin) connector on the Network Interface Card.

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

8

Ethernet/EtherTalk Network Card LED

Descriptions

The graphic and table below detail the names and functions of the LEDs on the Ethernet/EtherTalk Network Card. The graphic shows the card as it appears when installed in the slot in the rear of the DocuPrint printer.

Ethernet/EtherTalk Network Interface Card Legend

C

D

Legend

A

B

LED Name

LINK

POWER / IP

ADDRESS

Steady ON

Ethernet Link signal present

Power is applied

BNC / NO

LINK

ACTIVITY

BNC Connector Active

N/A

Flashing

N/A

Fast Flash means NO IP

Address assigned.

Slow Flash means IP address is assigned.

No Ethernet Link Signal present.

Flashes with network traffic.

C O N N E C T I N G T O Y O U R N E T W O R K

9

Token Ring/TokenTalk Network Card LED

Descriptions

The graphic and table below detail the names and functions of the LEDs on the Token Ring/TokenTalk Network Card. The graphic shows the card as it appears when installed in the slot in the rear of the DocuPrint printer.

Token Ring/TokenTalk Network Interface Card Legend

Legend

A

LED Name

POWER / IP

ADDRESS

Steady ON

Power applied

B ACTIVITY N/A

Flashing

Fast Flash means NO IP

Address assigned.

Slow Flash means IP address is assigned.

Flashes with network traffic.

Set an IP Address

Your DocuPrint printer can be set up on a variety of TCP/IP networks.

There are several ways in which your printer can be assigned a TCP/IP address depending on your network.

Static

Addressing

TCP/IP address is assigned manually by the

System Administrator and entered at the printer’s Control Panel.

Dynamic

Addressing

RARP/BOOTP

TCP/IP address is assigned automatically by the

Server.

Dynamic

Addressing

DHCP

(Dynamic Host

Resolution

Protocol)

TCP/IP address is assigned automatically by the

Server.

This section contains procedures for each of these methods. Determine which method will be used for your network and follow the steps of the appropriate procedure.

Dynamic Addressing Setup

The printer is assigned a TCP/IP address by a network RARP/BOOTP, or

DHCP server. This address is automatically assigned to the printer.

Perform the steps below:

1.

Press the

On Line

button on the Control Panel. Be sure the light next to it is OFF.

2.

Press the

Menu

button. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP

MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

appears on the Display

Panel and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press

Next

until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<TCP/IP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press

Next

while

<IP ADDRESS>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

With

<IP Address Res>

displayed, press

ENTER

.

8.

Press

Next

until

<Dynamic>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

9.

Exit the menu system.

10.

Reset the Printer to have the new settings take effect.

Dynamic Addressing (RARP/BOOTP)

The TCP/IP address is assigned automatically by the Server. Follow the steps below:

1.

Power the printer ON and allow time for an IP address to be assigned by the RARP/BOOTP server (this time may vary depending on network traffic.)

2.

Perform the steps contained in the section of this chapter entitled

Print the Print Settings Page

.

3.

Obtain the DocuPrint printer Network Card and TCP/IP addresses from the

Printer Settings

page.

4.

Update the RARP/BOOTP server’s

/etc/ethers

, and the

/etc/hosts

files with a host name, TCP/IP and Network Card addresses. Consult your

UNIX documentation for more RARP/BOOTP server configuration details.

Dynamic Addressing (DHCP)

The TCIP/IP address is assigned automatically by the Server.

1.

Power the printer ON and allow time for an IP address to be assigned by the DHCP server (this time may vary depending on network traffic).

2.

Perform the steps contained in the section of this chapter entitled

Print the Print Settings Page

.

3.

Obtain the DocuPrint printer Network Card and TCP/IP addresses from the Printer Settings page.

4.

Update the lease time, if necessary, depending on your printer usage patterns.

NOTE: If your network is using this protocol to assign TCP/IP addresses, be aware that the lease on the assigned address can run out if your printer is taken off the network for longer than the allocated lease time.

Static Addressing Setup

The printer is assigned a TCP/IP address by a network administrator. This address is manually input to the printer. Perform the steps below:

1.

Press the

On Line

button on the Control Panel. Be sure the light next to it is OFF.

2.

Press the

Menu

button. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP

MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

appears on the Display

Panel and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press

Next

until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<TCP/IP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press

Next

while

<IP ADDRESS>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

With

<IP Address Res>

displayed, press

ENTER

.

8.

Press

Next

until

<Static>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

9.

Press

ENTER

while

<SET IP ADDRESS>

is displayed.

10.

Press

Next

to increase the digit value. Press

Previous

to decrease the digit value. When each digit is correct, press the

Select

button to move on to the next digit.

11.

The

Next

button wraps around the display without setting the value if an error is made. After the complete IP address is displayed correctly, press

ENTER

. The IP address is now set.

12.

Reset the Printer to have the new settings take effect.

Setting a SUBNET MASK at the Control Panel

If your printer is connected to a WAN (Wide Area Network) you may restrict user access by setting a Subnet Mask.

1.

Press the

On Line

button on the Control Panel. Be sure the light next to it is OFF.

2.

Press

Menu

. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

appears on the Display

Panel and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press

Next

until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<TCP/IP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press

Next

until

<NET MASK>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

To set each digit of the subnet mask, press

Next

to increase the digit value. Press

Previous

to decrease the digit value. When each digit is correct, press the

Select

button to move on to the next digit.

8.

The

Next

button wraps around the display without setting the value if an error is made. After the complete IP address is displayed correctly, press

ENTER

. The IP address is now set.

9.

Reset Printer to have the new settings take effect.

Setting DEFAULT GATEWAY at the Control Panel

1.

Press the

On Line

button on the Control Panel. Be sure the light next to it is OFF.

2.

Press

Menu

. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

appears on the Display

Panel and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press

Next

until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<TCP/IP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press

Next

until

<GATEWAY>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

To set each digit of the subnet mask, press

Next

to increase the digit value. Press

Previous

to decrease the digit value. When each digit is correct, press the

Select

button to move on to the next digit.

8.

The

Next

button wraps around the display without setting the value if an error is made. After the complete IP address is displayed correctly, press

ENTER

. The Default Gateway address is now set.

9.

Reset Printer to have the new settings take effect.

Setting up APPSOCKET

1.

Press

On Line

on the Control Panel. Verify that the LED to the left of the button is

OUT

.

2.

Press the

Menu

button. The

ON-LINE

message will disappear and

TOP MENU

should be displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

appears on the Display

Panel and then press

ENTER

.

NOTE

: The Mode options are not applicable for APPSOCKET. The setting should always remain at AUTO SELECT.

TO CHANGE THE SETTINGS, FOLLOW THESE STEPS:

4.

Press

Next

until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<TCP/IP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press

Next

until

<APPSOCKET>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

Press

ENTER

while

<ENABLE>

is displayed.

8.

To enable APPSOCKET, press

ENTER

while

<YES>

is displayed.

9.

To disable APPSOCKET, press

Next

until

<NO>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

10.

Press

On Line

. Verify that the LED to the left of this button switches

ON

.

11.

The APPSOCKET default settings are:

<APPSOCKET> = <ENABLE> = <YES>

<MODE>

=

<AUTOSELECT>

Print the Print Settings Page

It is important to print a Print Settings page from the DocuPrint printer to determine the printer’s total memory, current Network Card (NIC) settings, and all current printer settings, for proper set up of the printer on the network. This information is used to verify port settings, verify NIC address, verify enabled printer options, check the print server name in the case of a Novell network, and to verify the AppleTalk name or zone if used in an AppleTalk network. The default settings will enable all ports, which will be suitable for most applications.

Obtain the current DocuPrint settings by printing the

Print Settings

page from the Printer’s Control Panel as follows:

NOTE: If you change any settings, print another

Print Settings

page to verify that your changes were made as desired.

1.

Press the

On Line

button on the Control Panel. Verify that the LED above this button is

OUT

.

2.

Press

Menu

. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press

Next

until

<PRINT>

appears on the Display Panel and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press

Next

until

<SETTINGS>

is displayed. Press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

until

<YES>

is displayed. Press

ENTER

. The

Print

Settings

page is printed.

6.

Press the

On Line

button. Verify that the LED above this button goes

ON

.

Where do I go from here?

The information provided in this section enabled you to connect your printer to your network.

Retain the

Print Settings

page you printed as a reference to the networkspecific, configuration parameters currently stored in your printer.

Proceed next to the chapter within this TIG covering your workstation

Operating System (for example,

Windows; Macintosh; UNIX; OS2

) and follow the setup instructions provided.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 1

Chapter 3

Novell NetWare Setup

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 2

Chapter Three Contents

Chapter Introduction................................ ................................ ................................ ... 3

Purpose of this Chapter................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 3

NetWare 3.1X Print Server setup with Setup Wizard ................................ .................. 4

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 4

Advanced Setup in Bindery Mode ................................ ................................ .............. 6

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 6

To Start Advanced Setup ................................ ................................ ....................... 6

To Change the Primary Server your Printer Will Service................................ ........ 6

To Create a Print Server ................................ ................................ ........................ 7

To Add/remove a User or Operator ................................ ................................ ........ 7

To Notify a User ................................ ................................ ................................ ..... 8

To Create a New Queue................................ ................................ ......................... 8

To Attach a Queue to a Print Server ................................ ................................ ...... 8

To Delete a Queue................................ ................................ ................................ . 9

To Detach a Queue from a Print Server ................................ ................................ . 9

To Send a Test Print to a Printer ................................ ................................ ............ 9

To Manage an Existing Queue ................................ ................................ ............. 10

NetWare 4.1X (NDS) Print Server setup with Setup Wizard ................................ ..... 11

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 11

Advanced Setup for NDS (NetWare Directory Services) Network............................. 13

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .......... 13

To Start Advanced Setup ................................ ................................ ..................... 13

To Change the NDS Tree................................ ................................ ..................... 13

To Change the Print Server Context ................................ ................................ .... 13

To Create a Print Server ................................ ................................ ...................... 14

To Add/Remove a User, Operator or Printer ................................ ........................ 14

To Manage a Printer ................................ ................................ ............................ 15

To Add/Remove Users or Operators to/from a Queue ................................ .......... 16

To Create/Delete a Queue ................................ ................................ ................... 16

To Send a Test Print to a Printer ................................ ................................ .......... 17

NetWare Troubleshooting ..................................................................................18

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 18

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 18

NetWare Troubleshooting Quick Check................................ ................................ .... 19

Novell NetWare Troubleshooting Step-by-Step ................................ ........................ 20

Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 20

Novell NetWare Hardware Step-by-Step ................................ .............................. 21

Novell NetWare Software Step-by-Step ................................ ............................... 23

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 3

Chapter Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to provide detailed information on Print

Server Installation, Initial Testing and Troubleshooting (if required) for the setup of your DocuPrint printer operating under the various

Novell NetWare versions.

This task would ordinarily be performed by an experienced Systems

Administrator.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to provide the required information to enable you to connect and set up your DocuPrint printer on your network as quickly as possible.

Requirements

In general, the requirements needed for printer connection and setup include:

A workstation with the Windows operating system software installed for that station and a working knowledge of the operating system.

CentreWare DP and appropriate print driver software loaded on your workstation.

You must be logged into a NetWare 3.1X or 4.1X network running the IPX protocol with SUPERVISOR or ADMIN privileges.

A network card installed in the DocuPrint printer, together with appropriate cabling to link the card to your network. A Print

Settings page from your DocuPrint printer. Refer to the chapter entitled Printer Connection and Setup for details on network card and cabling information, as well as how to print a Print

Settings page.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 4

NetWare 3.1X Print Server setup with Setup

Wizard

The DocuPrint C55/C55mp printer defaults will, in most cases, enable connection to Novell NetWare without adjustment.

NOTE: Token Ring ONLY - Speed and Source Routing must be set to the correct values. (Defaults are 16 Mbits/SEC and Yes)

Procedure

1.

Review the Print Settings page and VERIFY the following settings:

Ethernet or Token Ring (depending on NIC card) are

ENABLED.

Connector is set correctly for either BNC, RJ45, or DB9.

Auto is the Default and will probably work for most applications.

Frame Type matches the frame type of the desired fileserver.

Mode is set to your desired PDL (PostScript or PCL5C) or to

AutoSelect. You may wish to set Mode to the desired type if only one PDL will be used.

Print Server Name. If this printer is unconfigured, the default print server name is the letter ‘X’ followed by the last six digits of the network card serial number.

2.

Start the CentreWare DP application from your workstation. For more detailed information about the operation of CentreWare DP refer to the chapter entitled CentreWare DP Software

Instructions.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 5

3.

Click your mouse once on the Setup Wizard button or open the

Printer menu and select Setup Wizard.

4.

When the Setup Wizard Welcome screen appears, click Next >.

5.

When the Select NetWare Server dialog box screen appears, click once on the Install this device on a Bindery Server.

6.

Select a server from the drop-down list. Click Next >.

7.

If prompted, enter a user name and password for the desired server and click Login.

8.

The Name the Device dialog box screen will appear. You may enter a new name for the printer you have selected, or keep the default name. Click Next >.

9.

When the Select Queue dialog screen appears, you may select an existing queue, or create a new queue. To create a new queue, click the Create Queue button and enter a new queue name, then click Create Queue again. Once you have either selected a queue or created a new one, click Next >.

10.

The Confirm Choices dialog screen will appear and display the new Printer Name and name of new Queue information you have supplied. Click Finish >. The Wizard will pop up a configuration progress box.

11.

After a few moments, the Congratulations dialog screen will appear and a Startup page will print. Review this page to

VERIFY that your Primary Server and Print Server name agree with those you chose in Setup Wizard.

12.

Run a test print from a software application to verify the operation of your printer.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 6

Advanced Setup in Bindery Mode

Introduction

The Advanced Setup option of CentreWare DP gives you a tool to control how your devices are configured in your Novell NetWare network environment. This tool is only necessary for connecting your device to more than one file server or queue. For a connection to a single device and queue, use Setup Wizard.

To Start Advanced Setup

1.

Highlight a printer in the Printers List.

2.

Select the Printer menu and click Advanced Setup.

The current Primary Server and the Print Server

Name are displayed on the upper portion of the

Bindery Server TAB.

To Change the Primary Server your Printer Will

Service

1.

Click the Select Primary Server button. CentreWare

DP will scan your network and present you with a list of the file servers present. Click the Down button to view the scrollable list.

2.

Select a file server from the list or type a file server name and click OK.

3.

If prompted, enter a user name and password that has supervisory (or equivalent) rights for the desired server and click Login.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 7

To Create a Print Server

1.

Click the Create Print Server button. The Create

Print Server dialog box screen appears.

2.

Type a print server name in the Print Server: text box and click OK.

NOTE: You may choose a print server already defined from the drop-down list and make edited changes to help you with naming conventions.

To Add/remove a User or Operator

1.

Click the Manage Print Server button. The Manage

Print Server dialog box screen appears displaying two TABS: the User TAB and the Operator TAB.

2.

To add a user, operator, highlight the desired selection from the Available list and click Add >>. The selected item appears in the Assigned list.

3.

To delete a user, operator, highlight the desired selection under the Assigned list and click <<Move.

4.

To assign a user as an operator, select the Operator

TAB, highlight the user name in the Available Users list and click Add >>. The user name will appear in the Assigned Operators list.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 8

To Notify a User

1.

Click the Notify List button. The Printer Notify dialog box screen appears.

2.

Highlight a user name in the Available Users list and click Add >>.

3.

Highlight the user name that appears in the Notify

Users list.

4.

Click the Interval button. The Notify Interval dialog box screen appears.

5.

Set the notify intervals and click OK. Then click OK on the Printer Notify screen.

To Create a New Queue

1.

Select the file server to be used for the queue from the

Available File Server drop-down list.

2.

Click the Create Queue button. The Create Queue dialog box screen appears.

3.

Enter the desired name for the new queue and click

OK. A confirmation box will appear. Click OK again.

To Attach a Queue to a Print Server

1.

Select a file server from the Available File Server drop-down list.

2.

Select a queue from the Available Queues drop-down list.

3.

Click the Attach Queue button. The queue name will appear in the Queues serviced by the printer list.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 9

To Delete a Queue

1.

Highlight the name of the queue in the Available

Queues list.

2.

Click the Delete Queue button. Answer Yes to the prompt.

To Detach a Queue from a Print Server

1.

Highlight a queue in the Queues serviced by the

printer list.

2.

Click the Detach Queues button. Answer Yes to the prompt. The queue name will be removed from the

Queues serviced by the printer list.

To Send a Test Print to a Printer

1.

Highlight a queue in the Queues serviced by the

printer list.

2.

Click the Test Print button. Click OK to exit

Advanced Setup. If any configuration changes were made, a Wizard box appears. When it is done configuring your changes, your printer will initialize.

A sample print job will be sent to the selected queue and printed by the attached printer.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 10

To Manage an Existing Queue

1.

Select a queue from the list and click the Manage

Queue button.

2.

The Queue Manager dialog screen appears. This dialog screen has two TABs: User and Operator.

3.

To add a user to the Assigned Users list, click the user name in the Available Users list then click the

Add >> button.

4.

To remove a user from the Assigned Users list, click the user name in the Assigned Users list then click the

<<Move button.

5.

To add an operator to the queue, click the Operator

TAB, then click the user name in the Available Users list, then click Add >>.

6.

To remove an operator from the queue, click the

Operator TAB, then click the user name in the

Assigned Operators list, then click <<Move.

7.

Once you have finished with queue management click OK.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 11

NetWare 4.1X (NDS) Print Server setup with

Setup Wizard

The DocuPrint C55/C55mp printer defaults will, in most cases, enable connection to Novell NetWare without adjustment.

NOTE: Token Ring ONLY - Speed and Source Routing must be set to the correct values. (Defaults are 16 Mbits/SEC and Yes)

Procedure

1.

Review the Print Settings page and VERIFY the following settings:

Ethernet or Token Ring (depending on NIC card) are

ENABLED.

Connector is set correctly for either BNC, RJ45, or DB9.

Auto is the Default and will probably work for most applications.

Frame Type matches the frame type of the desired fileserver.

Mode is set to your desired PDL (PostScript or PCL5C) or to

Auto Select. You may wish to set Mode to the desired type if only one PDL will be used.

Print Server Name. If this printer is unconfigured, the default print server name is the letter ‘X’ followed by the last six digits of the network card serial number.

2.

Start the CentreWare DP application from your workstation. For more detailed information about the operation of CentreWare DP refer to the chapter entitled CentreWare DP Software

Instructions.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 12

3.

Click your mouse once on the Setup Wizard button or open the

Printer menu and select Setup Wizard.

4.

When the Setup Wizard Welcome screen appears, click Next >.

5.

When the Select NetWare Server dialog box screen appears, click once on the Install this device on an NDS Tree.

6.

Select the desired NDS Tree.

7.

If prompted, enter a user name and password for the desired Tree and click Login. Once your desired tree is chosen, click Next>.

8.

The Select Context dialog screen will appear and the default context for the selected Tree will be displayed. To configure your printer for this context, click Next >. To select a different context click Change Context, select a new context from the list, click

OK, then click Next >.

9.

The Name the Device dialog screen will appear. You may enter a new name for the printer you have selected, or keep the default name. Click Next >.

10.

When the Select Queue dialog screen appears, you may select an existing queue, or create a new queue. To create a new queue, click the Create Queue button and enter a new queue name, then click Create Queue again. Once you have either selected a queue or created a new one, click Next >.

11.

The Confirm Choices dialog screen will appear and display the new Printer Name, new Name of Queue, Context, and Tree information you have supplied. Click Finish>. The Wizard progress box will appear.

12.

After a few moments, the Congratulations dialog screen will appear and a Startup page will print. Review this page to

VERIFY that your Tree, Context, and Print Server name agree with those you chose in Setup Wizard.

13.

Run a test print from a software application to verify the operation of your printer.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 13

Advanced Setup for NDS (NetWare Directory

Services) Network

Introduction

The Advanced Setup option of CentreWare DP gives you a tool to control how your devices are configured in your Novell NetWare network environment. This tool is only necessary for connecting your device to more than one file server or queue. For a connection to a single device and queue, use Setup Wizard.

To Start Advanced Setup

1.

Highlight a printer in the Printers list.

2.

Select the Printer menu and Advanced Setup. Click the NDS TAB and the NDS window will appear. The

Current Context, NDS Tree and the Print Server

Context will be displayed on the upper portion of the

NDS Server TAB.

To Change the NDS Tree

1.

Click the Select Tree button. The Select Tree dialog box screen appears. CentreWare DP will scan your network and create a list of trees available.

2.

Select the Tree from the Trees drop-down list, or type in the desired tree name. Click OK.

3.

If prompted, enter a user name and password that has supervisory (or equivalent) rights for the desired server. Click Login.

To Change the Print Server Context

1.

Click the Select Context button.

2.

Select a Context from the list or type in your selection and click OK.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 14

To Create a Print Server

1.

Click the Create Print Server button. The Create

Print Server dialog box screen appears.

2.

Type the Print Server name in the Context text box and click OK.

NOTE: You may choose a print server already defined from the tree control list and make edited changes to help you with naming conventions.

To Add/Remove a User, Operator or Printer

1.

Highlight the print server name in the Print Layout graphic. Click the Print Server Manager button.

The Print Server Manager dialog screen appears with three TABS: the User TAB, the Operator TAB and the Printer TAB. Each TAB consists of an

Available list and an Assigned list.

2.

To add a user, operator or printer, highlight the desired selection from the Available list and click

Add>>. The selected item appears in the Assigned list.

3.

To delete a user, operator or printer, highlight the desired selection under the Assigned list and click <<Move.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 15

To Manage a Printer

1.

Highlight the print server name in the Print Layout graphic. Click the Manage Printer button. The

Manage Printer dialog screen appears. The dialog screen contains two TABs: Queue and Notify. Each

TAB consists of two lists: Available and Assigned.

2.

To assign a queue, highlight the desired selection in the Available list and click Add>>. The selection will appear in the Assigned list.

3.

If you have chosen to notify a user, click the Interval button. The Notify Interval dialog box screen appears.

4.

Set the notify interval and click OK.

5.

To remove a queue or user to be notified, highlight the desired selection in the Assigned list and click

<<Move.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 16

To Add/Remove Users or Operators to/from a

Queue

1.

Highlight the desired queue in the Print Layout.

Click the Manage Queue button. The Queue

Manager window appears. The window contains four TABs: User, Operator, Create Queue, and

Delete Queue.

2.

Select the User or Operator TAB. The TABs consist of two lists: Available and Assigned.

3.

To add a user or operator to a queue, highlight the desired selection in the Available list and click

Add>>. The selection will appear in the Assigned list.

4.

To remove a user or operator from a queue, highlight the desired selection in the Assigned list and click

<<Move.

To Create/Delete a Queue

1.

Highlight the desired queue in the Print Layout.

Click the Manage Queue button. The Queue

Manager window appears. The window contains four TABs: User, Operator, Create Queue and

Delete Queue.

2.

Select the Create Queue or Delete Queue TAB.

3.

To create a queue, select the context and volume, then type the new queue name in the Enter the new Queue name text box. Click the Create Queue button.

4.

To delete a queue, select queue from the tree, then click the Delete button.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 17

To Send a Test Print to a Printer

1.

From the main NDS Tree window, highlight a queue in the Print Layout list.

2.

Click the Test Print button. Click OK to exit

Advanced Setup. If any configuration changes were made a wizard box appears. When it is done configuring your changes, your printer will initialize.

A sample print job will be sent to the selected queue and printed by the attached printer.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 18

NetWare Troubleshooting

Introduction

Troubleshooting for the Windows-based PC consists of both hardware and software procedures.

The steps in each of these procedures should eliminate cabling, communication, and connection problems associated with directconnected ports.

Complete one of these procedures (based on the type of port being used), then run a test print from your software application. If the job prints, no further system troubleshooting will be necessary.

For problems with the appearance of your document, once it has printed, consult the Print Defect Troubleshooting chapter of the

DocuPrint User’s Guide.

Requirements

You are operating a Windows-based system with the CentreWare

DP software and at least one print driver installed.

You are a NetWare Network Administrator OR administrative person with ADMIN/SUPERVISOR or ADMIN/

SUPERVISOR EQUIVALENT login rights to the NetWare

Server(s) servicing the DocuPrint printer.

The instructions for these troubleshooting tasks assume a base knowledge of NetWare.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 19

NetWare Troubleshooting Quick Check

1.

VERIFY that the printer is plugged in, turned on, and connected to an active network.

2.

VERIFY that the Network Interface Card is receiving network traffic by monitoring the LEDs on the back of the DocuPrint printer NIC. When the DocuPrint NIC is connected to a functioning network receiving traffic, its link LED will be green, and its traffic LED will be flashing rapidly.

3.

VERIFY that the client is logged into the network and printing to the correct print queue. Also verify that the user has access to the

DocuPrint printer queue.

4.

VERIFY that the DocuPrint NetWare print queue exists, is accepting jobs, and has a Print Server attached. If not, try using

Quick Setup in CentreWare DP to reconfigure the print queue.

Reset the printer.

5.

Print out the DocuPrint Printer Settings page. Note the IPX

Settings section located in the Connectivity Settings section of the Print Settings sheet. Verify that Printer Server is enabled.

If not, enable it in the Control Panel and reset the printer.

VERIFY Ethernet Type or Token Ring Type. If it is

Adaptive, try setting it to the frame type your NetWare Server is using.

NOTE: To determine your NetWare IPX frame type, type config at the Novell 3.1X, 4.1X console screen. On networks using multiple

IPX frame types, it is CRITICAL that the frame type be set correctly.

6.

VERIFY that the Primary Server is set. (Primary Server should have been set during initial queue setup and installed using

CentreWare DP.) If it is not set, use CentreWare DP to set it and reset the printer.

NOTE: Setting the Primary Server is extremely important on large networks.

7.

If the above quick checks fail to fix the Network Print problem, contact Customer Service.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 20

Novell NetWare Troubleshooting Step-by-Step

Overview

The steps in this procedure should eliminate cabling, communication, and connection problems associated with network connected printers.

The steps are divided into two groups:

Hardware Step-by-Step

Software Step-by-Step

Software Step-by-Step assumes that you are connected to a Novell

NetWare network with Windows 3.1X, Windows for Workgroups, or

Windows 95 loaded on the client workstation.

Complete both of these procedures, then run a test print from your software application. If the job prints, no further system troubleshooting will be necessary. For print defects, refer to the Print

Defect Troubleshooting chapter of the DocuPrint User’s Guide.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 21

Novell NetWare Hardware Step-by-Step

1.

Check LED activity on the NIC card. Link (green) LED should be ON whenever it is connected to an active network. Traffic

(Yellow) LED should flicker with data reception.

2.

VERIFY cable connections. If possible, substitute a new cable or connectors from a known good system or printer.

3.

Check the port to which your printer is attached (concentrator or

MAU). Connect a known good network device to it and test.

4.

Print a Print Settings page from your DocuPrint printer. Use the

Control Panel’s Print menu to select Print Settings.

5.

Review the Connectivity Settings area of the page and check for these things:

Ethernet or Token Ring (depending on NIC card) are ENABLED.

NOTE: Token Ring ONLY - Speed and Source Routing must be set to the correct values. (Defaults are 16 Mbits/SEC and Yes)

Connector is set correctly for BNC, RJ45, or DB9. Auto is the

Default and will probably work for most applications.

Frame Type matches the frame type of the desired fileserver.

NOTE: To determine your NetWare IPX frame type, type config at the Novell 3.1X, or 4.1X console screen. On large networks, using multiple IPX frame types, it is CRITICAL that the frame type be set correctly.

Mode is set to your desired PDL (PostScript or PCL5C) or to

Auto Select. You may wish to set Mode to the desired type if only one PDL will be used.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 22

Primary Server (for NetWare 3.1X only) is set to the name of the server which serves the print queue you have assigned to the

DocuPrint printer.

Primary Tree (for NetWare 4.1X NDS only) is set for the correct

NDS tree name.

Context (for NetWare 4.1X NDS only) is set for the correct NDS

Context.

PServer Name is set for the name selected for this DocuPrint printer to act as a print server.

6.

If any changes are made, reset the printer. Once the printer has been reset, allow the printer approximately two minutes to go through self test and then log into the network server.

7.

Print out another Print Settings page to verify the items you modified were set and retained.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 23

Novell NetWare Software Step-by-Step

1.

Verify that CentreWare DP and a DocuPrint printer driver have been loaded on the workstation.

In Windows 3.1X or Windows for Workgroups, check Print

Manager to see the DocuPrint printer listed as an available printer.

In Windows 95, double click on My Computer (you may have changed this name). Open the Printers folder to verify that there is an entry for the type of DocuPrint printer you installed.

2.

Launch the CentreWare DP software.

In Windows 3.1X or Windows for Workgroups, locate the

CentreWare DP group and double click the CentreWare DP icon.

In Windows 95, click on the Start button and slide the highlight up to the Programs entry. In the next fold-out window, slide the highlight up or down until you reach the CentreWare DP entry.

Release the mouse button to launch.

3.

For either Windows 3.1X or Windows 95 platform, check the

Printers window at the left side of the CentreWare DP screen for the printer’s name. If no names appear, your station is unable to find a printer on the network. Perform the steps in the section entitled Hardware Step-by-Step to verify your printer’s settings, then return to this procedure.

4.

If the desired printer’s name appears, your printer is communicating through the network. Select the desired printer. If a communications error message appears, your printer is not able to communicate with your workstation. Perform the steps in the section entitled Hardware Step-by-Step to verify your printer’s settings, then return to this procedure.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 24

5.

Highlight the Diagnostics drop-down menu and select Printer

Maintenance.

6.

A new dialog box screen will appear with consumables information about the printer you selected. Close this dialog box.

7.

With the printer still selected, select the Printer drop-down menu and highlight the Advanced Setup entry.

8.

Under this menu will be a sub-menu for NetWare. Select this option.

9.

When the Advanced Setup dialog screen appears, verify the information contained on this screen against the information contained in the connectivity setting portion of the Print Settings page. Check for BOTH of these items:

Primary Server has the server name listed on the Print Settings page.

Check the queue name the DocuPrint printer is set to service. If necessary, create a new queue to test the printer.

10.

Exit this window and select the Tools drop-down menu.

11.

Select the Send File... menu item.

12.

When the Download Files dialog box screen appears, select the proper directory and file for downloading. Be sure this is a known good file with no errors.

13.

Click OK to download the file to your DocuPrint printer.

14.

Check the printer to verify that the print job has printed. If the job has not printed, consult the IPX settings and connector settings on the Print Settings page.

N O V E L L N E T W A R E S E T U P 25

15.

At the CentreWare DP main screen, select the Printer dropdown menu. Highlight the Properties entry.

16.

Once Properties is selected, highlight Connections.

17.

Select the Network Card TAB. A new dialog box screen is brought to the front and displays information about frame type and connectors.

18.

Be certain the card is enabled and the connector and frame type are correct.

19.

If any changes are made, reset the printer from the Control Panel and allow two minutes for the printer to reattach to the desired fileserver.

20.

Run a test print again. If the test print does not print, contact

Customer Service.

W I N D O W S 1

Chapter 4

Windows Peer-to-Peer Network

Setup

W I N D O W S 2

Chapter Four Contents

Chapter Introduction................................ ................................ ................................ ... 4

Purpose of this Chapter................................ ................................ .......................... 4

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 4

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 4

Software Installation.............................................................................................5

Software Install for Windows 3.X, Windows for Workgroups, & NT 3.5 (3.51) . 5

Software Install for Windows 95 ................................ ................................ ............. 7

Software Install for Windows NT 4.0 ................................ ................................ ...... 9

Windows 95 Peer-to-Peer Network ....................................................................10

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 10

Step-by-Step Setup (Peer-to-Peer, NetBEUI) ................................ ........................... 11

Windows NT 3.51 Peer-to-Peer Network ...........................................................14

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 14

Quick Install Steps (TCP/IP Protocol) ................................ ................................ ....... 15

Quick Install Steps (DLC/LLC Protocol) ................................ ................................ .... 18

Quick Install Steps (AppleTalk Protocol)................................ ................................ ... 20

Windows NT 4.0X Network...............................................................................24

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 24

Preliminary Steps ................................ ................................ ................................ ..... 24

Quick Install Steps (TCP/IP Protocol) ................................ ................................ ....... 25

Quick Install Steps (DLC/LLC Protocol) ................................ ................................ .... 28

Quick Install Steps (AppleTalk Protocol)................................ ................................ ... 30

Windows for Workgroups Peer-to-Peer Network ...............................................32

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 32

Step-by-Step Setup (Peer-to-Peer, NetBEUI) ................................ ........................... 33

W I N D O W S 3

Windows Troubleshooting..................................................................................36

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 36

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 36

Windows (all versions) Quick Check ................................ ................................ ........ 37

Windows 95 Troubleshooting ................................ ................................ ................... 38

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 38

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (TCP/IP Protocol) ................................ .............. 40

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 40

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (DLC/LLC Protocol) ................................ ........... 43

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 43

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (AppleTalk Protocol)................................ .......... 45

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 45

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (TCP/IP) ................................ .............................. 50

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 50

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (DLC/LLC) ................................ ........................... 52

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 52

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (AppleTalk) ................................ .......................... 54

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 54

W I N D O W S 4

Chapter Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to provide detailed information on

Software Installation, Initial Testing, and Troubleshooting (if required) for the setup of your DocuPrint printer operating under the various Windows versions.

This task would ordinarily be performed by an experienced Systems

Administrator.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to provide the required information to enable you to connect and set up your DocuPrint printer on your network as quickly as possible.

Requirements

Basic requirements for network printer connection and setup are listed for various workstation operating systems within the sections contained in this Technical Information Guide chapter.

In general, the requirements needed for printer connection and setup include:

A workstation with the appropriate operating system software installed for that station.

A working knowledge of the operating system being used on your workstation.

A network card installed in the DocuPrint printer, together with appropriate cabling to link the card to your network. Refer to the chapter entitled Printer Connection and Setup for details on network card and cabling information.

W I N D O W S 5

Software Installation

The Windows software Installer supplied with your DocuPrint C55 or

C55mp printer is designed to make one set of disks install the drivers and CentreWare DP application program for all Windows-based systems.

Software Install for Windows 3.X, Windows for

Workgroups, & NT 3.5 (3.51)

Software installation is accomplished using the DocuPrint installer which will automatically detect which version of Windows is being run and load the appropriate print drivers and Centreware DP for that version.

CentreWare DP is the Administration tool that allows configuration and monitoring of your DocuPrint printer.

1.

Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

2.

At the Program Manager screen, click on the FILE drop-down menu.

3.

Select the RUN command. A dialog box will prompt you for the

Command Line.

4.

TYPE <drive>\xrxsetup (substitute your drive letter for

<drive>).

W I N D O W S 6

5.

Choose the desired language and click NEXT>.

6.

After a few moments, the Install Shield Wizard will load. A new dialog screen with installation options will appear. Select from one of these options:

Typical Installation

Choosing this mode will automatically copy all necessary software to your hard disk in a predetermined directory.

Custom Installation

Choosing this mode will give you control over which files are copied to your hard drive and where they are placed.

Disk Image Copy

Choosing this mode gives you the ability to copy the entire disk set to a local or network drive. This mode is recommended to install the DocuPrint drivers and

CentreWare DP software to multiple stations on a network.

7.

Once you have selected your installation mode, click Next>.

8.

From the Select Printer screen, choose the type of printer you are installing, then click Next>.

9.

Follow the prompts (these will vary depending on the Install

Mode selected). Be sure to provide the correct disks when requested.

10.

When prompted, remove all disks. For network printing,

CentreWare DP will perform all fileserver and queue setup.

Details on Centreware DP are available in the chapter entitled

CentreWare DP Software Instructions.

W I N D O W S 7

Software Install for Windows 95

Software installation is accomplished using the DocuPrint installer which will automatically detect which version of Windows is being run and load the appropriate print drivers and CentreWare DP for that version. CentreWare DP is the Administration tool that allows configuration and monitoring of your DocuPrint printer.

For details on the operation of CentreWare DP, review the chapter in this manual entitled CentreWare DP Software Instructions.

1.

Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

2.

Click once on the Start button.

3.

Select the RUN command. A dialog box will prompt you for the

Command Line.

4.

TYPE <drive>\xrxsetup (substitute your drive letter for

<drive>).

5.

Choose the desired language and click NEXT>.

6.

After a few moments, the Install Shield Wizard will load. A new dialog screen with installation options will appear. Select from one of these options:

Typical Installation

Choosing this mode will automatically copy all necessary software to your hard disk in a predetermined directory.

Custom Installation

Choosing this mode will give you control over which files are copied to your hard drive and where they are placed.

Disk Image Copy

Choosing this mode gives you the ability to copy the entire disk set to a local or network drive. This mode is recommended to install the DocuPrint drivers and

CentreWare DP software to multiple stations on a network.

W I N D O W S 8

7.

Once you have selected your installation mode click Next>.

8.

From the Select Printer screen, choose the type of printer you are installing then click Next>.

9.

Follow the prompts (these will vary depending on the Install

Mode selected). Be sure to provide the correct disks when requested.

10.

When prompted, remove all disks. For network printing,

CentreWare DP will perform all fileserver and queue setup.

Details on Centreware DP are available in the chapter entitled

CentreWare DP Software Instructions.

W I N D O W S 9

Software Install for Windows NT 4.0

CentreWare DP software installation is accomplished using the

DocuPrint installer. For details on the operation of CentreWare DP, review the chapter in this manual entitled CentreWare DP Software

Instructions.

Windows NT 4.0 print drivers must be installed using the Add Printer function.

1.

Insert DocuPrint C55 CD-ROM in your in your CD-ROM drive.

2.

Click once on the Start button and select Settings, then on the fold out menu select Printers.

3.

Double-click the Add Printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard will start. Select My Computer and click Next>.

4.

Select the port for the printer (LPT1:,LPT2:, etc).

5.

The listing screen for manufacturers will appear. Click Have

Disk. At the next screen choose the Browse button to locate the print driver file.

6.

The files for drivers may be found in the \instal\Winnt40 directory. Both PCL and PostScript drivers may be selected from that directory.

7.

After selecting the appropriate driver click OK. In the next screen, verify the driver name you have chosen and clickNext>.

8.

The next screen will allow you to change the name of your printer and decide whether it will be the default printer. Make your selections and click Next>.

9.

A new screen appears which enables the sharing of the printer. If you share your printer be sure you select the operating systems which will be using the printer and click Next>.

10.

It is recommended that from the next page you select Yes to print a test page, then click Finish.

W I N D O W S 10

Windows 95 Peer-to-Peer Network

Requirements

A network card installed in the printer with appropriate cabling connected to your network.

A workstation with Windows 95 software installed.

Working knowledge of Windows 95.

W I N D O W S 11

Step-by-Step Setup (Peer-to-Peer, NetBEUI)

1.

Load your DocuPrint C55/C55mp CD-ROM.

2.

Go to your printer’s Control Panel and print the Print Settings page. Details are in this document in the section entitled Print

the Print Settings Page.

3.

Check the Print Settings page and verify that both NetBEUI protocol and desired connector are enabled.

4.

On the settings page note the NetBEUI Name, Service Name, and hardware address of the Network Interface Card.

5.

Run the Setup program located in the ,

<drive_letter>\instal\utility\WFW95P2P folder on your CD-

ROM. Follow the prompts and enter information as necessary.

The setup program will require you to restart Windows.

6.

At the Welcome screen click Next>.

7.

The Destination Location screen will appear, showing where the files will be installed. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

W I N D O W S 12

8.

A new screen will appear requesting a backup directory. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

9.

A new screen will appear requesting a spool directory. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

10.

A new screen will appear requesting a new folder’s name. You may type a new folder name, or select an existing folder from the list, then Click Next>.

11.

An information screen will appear and display the spool directory and print queue name for the queue you just installed. Note this information to be used when connecting a port to this queue.

12.

If you wish to view the ReadMe file click Yes, otherwise click

No.

13.

When your system restarts find the DLL Tool program group and double-click the Xerox DLL Config icon.

14.

The Configuration Option screen appears. Choose Add Xerox

Printer Queue and click Next>.

15.

Enter the MAC address of your printer’s network card and click

Next>.

16.

A new screen entitled Adding a New Queue will appear. Select the Xerox printer model and click Next>.

W I N D O W S 13

17.

A new screen entitled Adding a New Queue will appear. Enter the desired printer port name and click Next>.

18.

An information screen will appear. Note the port name displayed.

It should contain the logical drive name and path of the location of your spool directory. Click Next>.

19.

Select Exit. Click Next>.

20.

You will be returned to the configuration screen. Select the radio button to reboot your computer. Click Finish.

21.

The print queue will be created. Start your windows Control

Panel and double-click Printers.

22.

Select a printer with the right mouse button. Select the Properties entry in the cascade menu.

23.

Select the Details TAB and use the Ports drop-list menu to choose the queue you created during installation. Click OK.

24.

Open an application and print a test page to verify operation.

W I N D O W S 14

Windows NT 3.51 Peer-to-Peer

Network

Requirements

A workstation with Windows NT installed.

Working knowledge of Windows NT.

A network card installed in the printer with appropriate cabling connected to your network.

Quick Install Steps (TCP/IP Protocol)

W I N D O W S 15

1.

Install the Network Interface Card in the printer (if not already installed). Details are in this document in the section entitled

Installation of the Network Interface Card.

2.

Connect appropriate cabling from printer to network. Details are in this document in the section entitled Network Cable

Connection.

3.

Refer to the section in this document entitled Set An IP Address and perform one of the provided procedures to set an IP address for your printer.

4.

Print the Print Settings page. Details are in this document in the section entitled Print The Print Settings Page.

5.

Check the Print Settings page and verify that both proper protocol and desired connector are enabled.

6.

Note the DocuPrint TCP/IP address.

7.

Verify that “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is loaded.

8.

From your desktop, open the Main Group

9.

Double-click the Control Panel icon.

10.

Double-click Network icon. Use the mouse and scroll through the Installed Network Software list. Verify that the “Microsoft

TCP/IP Printing” is listed in the Installed Network Software window.

W I N D O W S 16

11.

If this software is not present, click Add Software and install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft.

12.

From your desktop, open the Main Group

13.

Double-click the Control Panel icon.

14.

Double-click Printers icon.

15.

Print Manager executes.

16.

Create a new printer in the Print Manager window: To do this:

17.

Pull down the Printer drop-down menu and select Create

Printer.

18.

From the Create Printer dialog box, name the printer and select a print device.

19.

Name the printer queue by typing in a name in the Printer Name: type in field.

20.

Select the DocuPrint print driver from the Driver: pull-down window.

21.

If the DocuPrint driver does not appear in this list, then you must install the driver before you continue by selecting Other.. in this window. You will need the DocuPrint C55 CD-ROM.

W I N D O W S 17

22.

From the Create Printer dialog box you must now select a printer device:

23.

Select Print to: and pull down this window and select Other...

This will open up the Print Destinations window. Select LPR

Port from the Print Destinations window and select OK.

24.

This will open up the Add LPR compatible printer window.

Type in the IP address of the DocuPrint printer and “ps” for the printer name and select OK. Note that the printer name is case sensitive.

25.

To Share the printer, click in the check box next to Share this

printer on the network. If the printer will not be shared, move to the next step.

26.

Select OK to close the Create Printer window. You can now print to the printer. If you shared it, your NT clients can now also print.

27.

Send a print job to the printer.

28.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

29.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 18

Quick Install Steps (DLC/LLC Protocol)

1.

Install the Network Interface Card in the printer (if not already installed) using the instructions included with the card.

2.

Connect appropriate cabling from printer to network. Details are in this document in the section entitled Network Cable

Connection.

3.

Print the Print Settings page. Details are in this document in the section entitled Print The Print Settings Page.

4.

Check the Print Settings page to verify that both proper protocol and desired connector are enabled.

5.

Insert the install disk 1 in drive A: or the DocuPrint C55 CD-

ROM in your CD-ROM drive at the Windows NT fileserver.

6.

Use your mouse to double-click the Control Panel icon.

7.

Double-click the Printers icon.

8.

Click Printers from the Print Manager menu bar.

9.

Select Create Printer from the drop-down menu using the mouse.

Then enter a unique printer name in the field provided.

10.

Click the drop-down arrow in the Drivers area.

11.

Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Other...

12.

Click the OK button.

13.

Scroll the list if necessary and select the desired Printer and click

OK.

14.

When driver is installed, enter a description in the Create Printer

Description area.

15.

Click the drop-down arrow in the Print to: area.

W I N D O W S 19

16.

Scroll to the Other... entry.

17.

Click on Hewlett-Packard Network Port in the Available Print

Monitors box and click OK.

18.

Enter a unique name for the port to be used in the area provided.

19.

Choose the Port Address from the list of ports, then click OK.

20.

To share the printer, check the Share this printer check box on the network.

21.

Enter a Share Name and Location and click OK.

22.

Reboot your Windows NT server and log in normally.

23.

Send a print job to the printer.

24.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

25.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 20

Quick Install Steps (AppleTalk Protocol)

1.

Install the Network Interface Card in the printer (if not already installed). Details are in this document in the section entitled

Installation of the Network Interface Card.

2.

Connect appropriate cabling from printer to network. Details are in this document in the section entitled Network Cable

Connection.

3.

Print the Print Settings page. Details are in this document in the section entitled Print The Print Settings Page.

4.

Check the Print Settings page to verify that both proper protocol and desired connector are enabled.

5.

Note the DocuPrint Printer Name and Zone on the Print

Settings page.

6.

Printer Name can be found in the General Information area of the Print Settings sheet.

7.

Zone can be found in the Connectivity Settings area of the Print

Settings page under EtherTalk Zone. The default for EtherTalk

Zone is *. (*=Default Zone defined on the network)

8.

Verify that AppleTalk is loaded. To do this you must be logged in at the NT Server. Follow the steps below:

W I N D O W S 21

9.

Use the mouse and open the Main Program Group

10.

From the Main group double-click the Control Panel icon.

11.

In the Control Panel group double-click the Network icon.

12.

Verify that the “AppleTalk Protocol” (Services for Macintosh on NT Servers) is listed in the “Installed Network software” window. You may need to scroll the window to see the AppleTalk entry.

13.

If AppleTalk Protocol (Macintosh Services) is NOT loaded, load this AppleTalk Protocol software with the [Add Software] button. Refer to your Windows NT documentation for the procedure needed to add this software

14.

Click the Close button in the Network Settings window. This will return you to the Control Panel window.

15.

Double-click on the Printers icon. The Windows NT Print

Manager window appears.

16.

Create a new printer in the Print Manager window. To do this, click once on the Printer entry on the menu bar at the top of the window. A pull-down menu appears.

17.

Use the mouse to select the Create Printer entry and release the mouse button. The Create Printer dialog box will open.

18.

From the Create Printer dialog box name the printer.

19.

Name the printer queue by entering a name in the Printer Name field.

W I N D O W S 22

20.

Use the mouse to select the Xerox DocuPrint printer driver from the Driver pull-down window. Do this by clicking once on the arrow symbol at the right of the entry box. It may be necessary to scroll the list to find the Xerox DocuPrint printer entry.

NOTE: If the DocuPrint driver does not appear in this list, then you must install the driver before you continue by selecting Other.. in this window. You will need the DocuPrint CD-ROM.

21.

From the Create Printer menu you must now select a printer device:

22.

Use the mouse and click once to select Print to:

23.

Pull down this window with the arrow on the side of the dropdown box, scroll down to the bottom, and select Other... This opens up the Print Destinations window.

24.

Select “AppleTalk Printing Devices” from the Print

Destinations window.

25.

Use your mouse to click OK.

26.

Refer to the Print Settings page to determine the DocuPrint

AppleTalk Name and Zone.

27.

Use the mouse to select an appropriate zone and AppleTalk device.

28.

This will cause NT to scan your network for available AppleTalk print devices.

29.

Click once on OK to pick the DocuPrint C55 as the desired

AppleTalk printing device.

NOTE: Normally you should see multiple AppleTalk zones in the

AppleTalk Printing Devices window. If you do not, this could mean that there are no AppleTalk routers on your network. If this is the case, then zones will NOT display in the AppleTalk Printing Devices window.

W I N D O W S 23

30.

Click once to select the DocuPrint device from the list of available

AppleTalk print devices.

31.

A dialog box appears and allows you to decide if you would like to capture the AppleTalk Printing device.

32.

Click YES if you wish all AppleTalk printing to go through this queue.

33.

Click NO if you wish all AppleTalk clients to print directly to the printer.

34.

You will be returned to the Create Printer window.

35.

If you wish to share the printer with other users on the network, click once on the check box for Share this printer on the

network. If not, go to the next step.

36.

Select OK to close this window and click OK again to exit

Create Printer window.

37.

You can now print to the DocuPrint Color Laser printer. If you shared it, your NT clients can now print as well.

38.

Send a print job to the printer.

39.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

40.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 24

Windows NT 4.0 Network

Introduction

Your printer can be installed on a Windows NT network using one of three methods:

TCP/IP protocol

DLC/LLC protocol

AppleTalk protocol

The Preliminary Steps given below must be accomplished for all printers regardless of the protocol that is being used. Then, the Quick

Install Steps will detail the installation based on the protocol used on your network.

Preliminary Steps

1.

Install the Network Interface Card in the printer (if not already installed). Details are in this document in the section entitled

Installation of the Network Interface Card.

2.

Connect appropriate cabling from printer to network. Details are in this document in the section entitled Network Cable

Connection.

3.

Print the Print Settings page. Details are in this document in the section entitled Print The Print Settings Page. Retain this page for reference.

4.

Check the Print Settings page and verify that both the desired protocol and connector are enabled.

5.

Proceed to the Quick Install Steps for your network protocol.

W I N D O W S 25

Quick Install Steps (TCP/IP Protocol)

1.

At the Desktop, right mouse click the Network Neighborhood icon and select Properties.

2.

Click on the Protocols TAB and verify that the TCP/IP protocol has been loaded.

3.

Select the Services TAB and verify that “Microsoft TCP/IP

Printing” is loaded.

4.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

5.

Open the Control Panel and double-click the Printers icon.

6.

Double-click Add Printer.

7.

The Add Printer Wizard starts.

8.

Verify that My Computer is selected and click Next>.

9.

Click Add Port.

W I N D O W S 26

10.

From the list that appears select LPR Port.

11.

Click New Port.

12.

This will open up the Add LPR compatible printer Window.

Type in the IP address of the DocuPrint printer and “ps” for the printer name and select OK. Note that the printer name is case sensitive.

13.

The Wizard will return you to the previous dialog. Verify that the new IP address you entered is in the list and correct. The check box to the left of the address must be checked. If it is not, check it then select Next>.

14.

Insert disk 1 of the install set, or the DocuPrint CD-ROM, and click Have Disk.

15.

Click the Browse button and select the directory containing the

Windows NT drivers.

16.

Select the appropriate .INF file, then click Open.

17.

When the Wizard returns you to the previous dialog, verify that the path and file name are correct, and click OK.

18.

At the next dialog, enter a name for the printer and select whether you want that printer to be the default, then click Next>.

W I N D O W S 27

19.

If the printer will not be shared, click Next>. To share the printer, enter a Share Name , check the share check box, then click Next>.

20.

At the next dialog it is recommended that you print a test page.

Click Finish.

21.

Wait for the Test Print to print. When a new dialog asks for confirmation of the test print, click Yes.

22.

Send a print job to the printer.

23.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

24.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

NOTE: With printers connected to a Windows NT network, with

TCP/IP protocol enabled, you can use a Web Browser to monitor and configure your printer. Refer to the section in this document entitled

Internet Printer Services for further information.

W I N D O W S 28

Quick Install Steps (DLC/LLC Protocol)

1.

At the Desktop, right mouse click the Network Neighborhood icon and select Properties.

2.

Click on the Protocols TAB and verify that the DLC/LLC

protocol has been loaded.

3.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

4.

Open the Control Panel and double-click the Printers icon.

5.

Double-click Add Printer.

6.

The Add Printer Wizard starts.

7.

Verify that My Computer is selected and click Next>.

8.

Click Add Port.

9.

Select the Hewlett-Packard Network Port in the Available Print

Monitors box and click OK.

10.

Enter a unique name for the port to be used, in the area provided.

11.

Choose the Port Address from the list of ports.

12.

Click Timers and verify that the Job Based connection is selected. Then click OK.

W I N D O W S 29

13.

Click OK. The Wizard will return you to the previous dialog.

Verify the new port name you entered is in the list and correct.

The check box to the left of the port name must be checked. If it is not, check it then select Next>.

14.

Insert disk 1 of the install set, or the DocuPrint CD-ROM, and click Have Disk.

15.

Click the Browse button and select the directory containing the

Windows NT drivers.

16.

Select the appropriate .INF file, then click Open.

17.

When the Wizard returns you to the previous dialog, verify that the path and file name are correct and click OK.

18.

At the next dialog, enter a name for the printer and select whether you want that printer to be the default, then click Next>.

19.

If the printer will not be shared, click Next>. To share the printer, enter a Share Name , check the share check box, then click Next>.

20.

At the next dialog it is recommended that you print a test page.

Click Finish.

21.

Wait for the Test Print to print. When a new dialog asks for confirmation of the test print, click Yes.

22.

Send a print job to the printer.

23.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

24.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 30

Quick Install Steps (AppleTalk Protocol)

1.

At the Desktop, right mouse click the Network Neighborhood icon and select Properties.

2.

Click on the Protocols TAB and verify that the AppleTalk protocol has been loaded.

3.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

4.

Open the Control Panel and double-click the Printers icon.

5.

Double-click Add Printer.

6.

The Add Printer Wizard starts.

7.

Verify that My Computer is selected and click Next>.

8.

Click Add Port.

9.

Select the AppleTalk Printing Devices and click New Port.

10.

Choose the DocuPrint C55 device from the list, then click OK.

11.

At the next dialog, when asked whether to capture that port, click NO.

12.

Click OK. When the Wizard returns you to the previous dialog, verify that the port name you entered is in the

and correct. The check box to the left of the port name must be checked. If it is not, check it, then select Next>.

13.

Insert disk 1 of the install set, or the DocuPrint CD-ROM, and click Have Disk.

W I N D O W S 31

14.

Click the Browse button and select the directory containing the

Windows NT drivers, then click Open.

15.

Select the appropriate .INF file, then click OK.

16.

When the Wizard returns you to the previous dialog, verify that the path and file name are correct and click OK.

17.

At the next dialog, enter a name for the printer and select whether you want that printer to be the default, then click Next>.

18.

If the printer will not be shared, click Next>. To share the printer, enter a Share Name , check the share check box, then click Next>.

19.

At the next dialog it is recommended that you print a test page.

Click Finish.

20.

Wait for the Test Print to print. A new dialog will ask for confirmation of the test print, click Yes.

21.

Send a print job to the printer.

22.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

23.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in this chapter of the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp Technical Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 32

Windows for Workgroups Peer-to-

Peer Network

Requirements

A network interface card installed in the printer with appropriate cabling connected to your network.

A workstation with Windows 3.11 for Workgroups installed.

Microsoft NetBEUI protocol installed and selected as the default

Network Protocol.

DocuPrint PostScript or PCL5C Print Drivers installed.

W I N D O W S 33

Step-by-Step Setup (Peer-to-Peer, NetBEUI)

1.

Load your DocuPrint C55/C55mp CD-ROM.

2.

Run the software installer and install the print drivers for your printer. Details for this are found in the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

CD ROM.

3.

From your printer’s Control Panel, print the Print Settings page.

Details are in this document in the section entitled Print The

Print Settings page.

4.

Check the Print Settings page and verify that both NetBEUI protocol and desired connector are enabled.

5.

On the settings page note the NetBEUI Name, Service Name, and hardware address of the Network Interface Card.

6.

Run the Setup program located in the

<drive_letter>\instal\utility\WFW95P2P folder on your CD-

ROM drive. Follow the prompts and enter information as necessary. The setup program will require you to restart

Windows.

7.

At the Welcome screen click Next>.

8.

The Destination Location screen will appear, showing where the files will be installed. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

W I N D O W S 34

9.

A new screen will appear requesting a backup directory. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

10.

A new screen will appear requesting a spool directory. Change the directory with the Browse button, or click Next>.

11.

A new screen will appear requesting a new folder’s name. You may type a new folder name, or select an existing folder from the list, then Click Next>.

12.

An information screen will appear and display the spool directory and print queue name for the queue you just installed. Note this information to be used when connecting a port to this queue.

13.

The Setup Complete window will appear. Select the radio button to reboot your computer. Click Finish.

14.

If you wish to view the ReadMe file click Yes, otherwise click

No.

15.

When your system restarts find the DLL Tool program group and double-click the Xerox DLL Config icon.

16.

The Configuration Option screen appears. Choose Add Xerox

Printer Queue and click Next>.

17.

Enter the MAC address of your printer’s network card and click

Next>.

18.

A new screen entitled Adding a New Queue will appear. Select the Xerox printer model and click Next>.

W I N D O W S 35

19.

A new screen entitled Adding a New Queue will appear. Enter the desired printer port name and click Next>.

20.

An information screen will appear. Note the port name displayed.

It should contain the logical drive name and path of the location of your spool directory. Click Next>.

21.

Select Exit. Click Next>.

22.

You will be returned to the configuration screen. Select the radio button to reboot your computer. Click Finish.

23.

The print queue will be created. Start your windows Control

Panel and double-click Printers.

24.

Select a printer driver and click Connect. Select the port indicated in the information screen and click OK.

25.

Print as test page to verify operation.

W I N D O W S 36

Windows Troubleshooting

Introduction

Troubleshooting for the Windows-based PC is comprised of a set of procedures for each Windows version.

The steps in these procedures should eliminate cabling, communication, and connection problems.

Complete one set of procedures (based on your version of Windows), then run a test print from your software application. If the job prints, no further system troubleshooting will be necessary.

For problems with the appearance of your document, once it has printed, consult the Print Defect Troubleshooting chapter of the

DocuPrint User Guide.

Requirements

A Windows-based system with the CentreWare DP software and at least one print driver installed.

A basic operating knowledge of your Windows version.

W I N D O W S 37

Windows (all versions) Quick Check

1.

VERIFY that the printer is plugged in, turned on, and connected to an active network.

2.

VERIFY that the Network Interface Card is receiving network traffic by monitoring the LED’s on the back of the DocuPrint printer NIC. When the DocuPrint NIC is connected to a functioning network receiving traffic, its link LED will be green, and its traffic LED will be flashing rapidly.

3.

VERIFY that the client is logged into the network and printing to the correct print queue. Also verify that the user has access to the

DocuPrint Printer Queue.

4.

VERIFY that the DocuPrint NetWare print queue exists, is accepting jobs, and has a Print Server attached. If not, try using

Quick Setup in CentreWare DP to reconfigure the print queue.

Reset the printer.

5.

Print out the DocuPrint Printer Settings page. Note the IPX

Settings section located in the Connectivity Settings section of the settings sheet. Verify that Printer Server is enabled. If not,

enable it in the Control Panel and reset the printer. VERIFY

Ethernet Type. If it is Adaptive, try setting it to the frame type your NetWare Server is using.

NOTE: To determine your NetWare IPX frame type, type config at the Novell 3.1X, 4.1X console screen. On large networks using multiple IPX frame types, it is CRITICAL that the frame type be set correctly.

6.

VERIFY that the Primary Server is set. (Primary Server should have been set during initial queue setup and installed using

CentreWare DP.) If it is not set, use CentreWare DP to set it and reset the printer.

NOTE: Setting the Primary Server is extremely important on large networks.

7.

If the above quick checks fail to fix the Network Print problem,

Contact Customer Service.

W I N D O W S 38

Windows 95 Troubleshooting

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Verify these items in the Network Settings area of the Print

Settings page:

Connector Type is set for Auto OR the specific type that you have used to connect the printer to your network.

2.

Verify these items in the NetBEUI area of the Print Settings page:

Enabled: is set to Yes.

Name: contains the desired name for the printer.

3.

Verify the following items in the Software and Memory area of the Print Settings page:

Interpreters: PCL or PostScript (depending on your driver).

4.

From a workstation desktop use the right mouse button and select

Network Neighborhood then with the left mouse button select

Properties from the cascade menu.

W I N D O W S 39

5.

The Network dialog will appear. Select the Configuration TAB.

6.

Check the list of installed network components for the following items:

Xerox Color Laser Peer to Peer

Client for Microsoft networks

NetBEUI

7.

If you have elected to run CentreWare DP you must:

Novell Networks – You are required to load Novell IntranetWare

Client or Client for IPX printer discovery.

TCP/IP Networks – No additional software is required but your printer must have a valid TCP/IP address assigned.

8.

If any of the above protocols or services were not installed, install any components necessary and restart the system..

9.

Once rebooted, select the Start button and Settings, then select the

Printers folder. The printers window will appear.

10.

Verify that you have selected the correct driver for your printer.

11.

Right mouse click on the printer icon and select Properties.

12.

Select the Details TAB.

13.

Verify the driver name in the Print using the following driver list. If necessary reselect or install a new driver.

14.

Verify the port name in the Print to the following port list. If necessary reselect the correct name.

15.

Start an application and send a print job to the printer. If printer still does not print contact your Cutomer Support representative.

W I N D O W S 40

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (TCP/IP

Protocol)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Verify these items in the Network Settings area of the Print

Settings page:

Connector Type: is set for Auto OR the specific type that you have used to connect the printer to your network.

2.

Verify these items in the TCP/IP area of the Print Settings page:

IP Address Resolution: is set to DHCP, Static, or RARP/BootP

(depending on your network configuration).

Current IP Address: is set correctly (note this address if it is assigned dynamically).

Subnet Mask: is set correctly (if used).

Default Gateway: is set correctly (if used).

LPR must be enabled to allow printing. Check the TFTP,

Appsocket, and Telnet settings and verify they are set as desired.

These settings are not critical to operation but provide some security and usability features.

W I N D O W S 41

3.

Verify the following items in the Software and Memory area of the Print Settings page:

Interpreters: PCL or PostScript (depending on your driver).

4.

From the server open the Control Panel and double-click the

Network icon.

5.

Verify that “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is loaded.

6.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

7.

From your desktop, open the Main Group

8.

Double-click the Control Panel icon.

9.

Double-click Printers icon.

10.

Print Manager executes.

11.

In the Print Manager Window, select the printer that you created when you installed the printer driver.

12.

Pull down the Printer drop-down menu and select Properties.

13.

Name the printer queue by typing in a name in the Printer

Name: text entry field.

14.

Select the DocuPrint print driver from the Driver: pull down window or .

15.

If the DocuPrint driver does not appear in this list than you must install the driver before you continue by selecting Other.. in this window. You will need the DocuPrint C55 CD-ROM.

W I N D O W S 42

16.

From the Create Printer dialog box you must now select a printer device:

17.

Select Print to: and pull down this window and select Other...

This will open up the Print Destinations window. Select “LPR

Port” from the Print Destinations window and select OK.

18.

This will open up the Add LPR compatible printer window.

Type in the IP address of the DocuPrint printer and “ps” for the printer name and select OK. Note that the printer name is case sensitive.

19.

To Share the printer click in the check box next to Share this

printer on the network. For unshared printers skip to the next step.

20.

Select OK to close Create Printer window. You can now print to the printer. If you shared it, your NT clients can now also print.

21.

Send a print job to the printer.

22.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

23.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in the DocuPrint C55/C55mp Technical

Information Guide to correct the problem.

NOTE: Printers connected to a Windows NT network with TCP/IP protocol enabled can use a Web Browser to monitor and configure your printer. Refer to the section in this document entitled Internet

Printer Services.

W I N D O W S 43

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (DLC/LLC

Protocol)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Open the Control Panel and double-click the Network icon.

2.

Verify that “DLC/LLC Protocol” is loaded.

3.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

4.

Insert the install disk 1 in drive A: or the DocuPrint C55 CD-

ROM in your CD-ROM drive at the Windows NT fileserver.

5.

Use the mouse and Double click the Control Panel icon.

6.

Then Double click the Printers icon.

7.

Click Printers from the Print Manager Menu bar.

8.

Select Create Printer. Then enter a unique printer name in the field provided.

9.

Click the drop-down arrow in the Drivers area.

10.

Scroll to the bottom of the list and click Other...

W I N D O W S 44

11.

Click the OK button.

12.

Scroll the list if necessary and select the desired Printer.

Click OK.

13.

When driver is installed, enter a description in the Create Printer

Description area.

14.

Click Drop-down Arrow in the Print to: area.

15.

Scroll to the Other... entry.

16.

Click on Hewlett-Packard Network Port in the Available Print

Monitors box and click OK.

17.

Enter a unique name for the port to be used in the area provided.

18.

Choose the Port Address from the list of ports, then click OK.

19.

To share the printer, check the Share this printer checkbox on the network.

20.

Enter a Share Name and Location. Click OK.

21.

Reboot your Windows NT server and log in normally.

22.

Send a print job to the printer.

23.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

24.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in the DocuPrint C55/C55mp Technical

Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 45

Windows NT 3.5X Troubleshooting (AppleTalk

Protocol)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Open the Control Panel and double-click the Network icon.

2.

Verify that “AppleTalk Protocol” or “Services for Macintosh“ loaded.

3.

If this software is not present, install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft. Then return to this document.

4.

Note the DocuPrint Printer Name and Zone by printing the Print

Settings page.

5.

Printer Name can be found in the General Information area of the Print Settings sheet.

6.

Zone can be found in the Connectivity Settings area of the Print

Settings page under EtherTalk Zone. The default for EtherTalk

Zone is *. (*=the network’s Default Zone)

W I N D O W S 46

7.

Double-click the Printers icon. The Windows NT PrintManager window appears.

8.

Create a new printer in the Print Manager window. To do this, click once on the Printer entry on the menu bar at the top of the window. A pull-down menu appears.

9.

Use the mouse to select the Create Printer entry and release the mouse button. The Create Printer dialog box will open.

10.

From the Create Printer dialog box name the printer.

W I N D O W S 47

11.

Name the printer queue by entering a name in the Printer Name field.

12.

Use the mouse to select the Xerox DocuPrint printer driver from the Driver pull-down window. Do this by clicking once on the arrow symbol at the right of the entry box. It may be necessary to scroll the list to find the Xerox DocuPrint printer entry.

NOTE: If the DocuPrint driver does not appear in this list, then you must install the driver before you continue by selecting

Other.. in this window. You will need the DocuPrint CD-ROM.

13.

From the Create Printer menu you must now select a printer device:

14.

Use the mouse and click once to select Print to:

15.

Pull down this window with the arrow on the side of the dropdown box, scroll down to the bottom, and select Other...

16.

This opens up the Print Destinations window.

17.

Select “AppleTalk Printing Devices” from the Print

Destinations window.

18.

Use the mouse and click OK.

19.

Refer to the Print Settings page, determine the DocuPrint

AppleTalk Name and Zone.

20.

Use the mouse to select an appropriate zone and AppleTalk device.

W I N D O W S 48

21.

This will cause NT to scan your network for available AppleTalk print devices.

22.

Click once on OK to pick the DocuPrint C55 as the desired

AppleTalk printing device.

NOTE: Normally you should see multiple AppleTalk zones in the

AppleTalk Printing Devices window. If you do not, this could mean that there are no AppleTalk routers on your network. If this is the case, then zones will NOT display in the AppleTalk Printing Devices window.

23.

Click once to select the DocuPrint device from the list of available

AppleTalk print devices.

24.

A dialog box appears and allows you to decide if you would like to capture the AppleTalk Printing device.

25.

Click YES if you wish all AppleTalk printing to go through this queue.

26.

Click NO if you wish all AppleTalk clients to print directly to the printer.

27.

You will be returned to the Create Printer window.

W I N D O W S 49

28.

If you wish to share the printer with other users on the network, click once on the check box for Share this printer on the

network. If not, go to the next step.

29.

Select OK to close this window and click OK again to exit

Create Printer window.

30.

You can now print to the DocuPrint Color Laser printer. If you shared it, your NT clients can now print as well.

31.

Send a print job to the printer.

32.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of the DocuPrint C55/C55mp

User Guide to correct the problem.

33.

If your print job did not print, see the Troubleshooting section for your operating system in the DocuPrint C55/C55mp Technical

Information Guide to correct the problem.

W I N D O W S 50

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (TCP/IP)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Verify these items in the Network Settings area of the Print

Settings page:

Connector Type: is set for Auto OR the specific type that you have used to connect the printer to your network.

2.

Verify these items in the TCP/IP area of the Print Settings page:

IP Address Resolution: is set to DHCP, Static, or

RARP/BOOTP (depending on your network configuration).

Current IP Address: is set correctly (note this address if it is assigned dynamically).

Subnet Mask: is set correctly (if used).

Default Gateway: is set correctly (if used).

LPR must be enabled to allow printing. Check the TFTP,

Appsocket, and Telnet settings and verify they are set as desired.

These settings are not critical to operation but provide some security and usability features.

W I N D O W S 51

3.

Verify the following items in the Software and Memory area of the Print Settings page:

Interpreters: PCL or PostScript (depending on your driver).

4.

From the server desktop use the right mouse button and select

Network Neighborhood then with the left mouse button select

Properties from the cascade menu.

5.

The Network dialog will appear. Select the Protocols TAB.

6.

Check the list of installed network protocols for the following item:

TCP/IP Protocol

7.

If you have elected to run CentreWare DP you must also have loaded Novell NetWare Client 32, a Novell server on the

internet, and an NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible transport protocol component. You may also discover printers that have been assigned a TCP/IP address.

8.

As required, click Add and install any components not listed and restart the system..

9.

Once rebooted, select the Start button and Settings, then select the Printers folder. The printers window will appear.

10.

Verify that you have loaded and selected the correct driver for your printer.

11.

Right mouse click on the Printer icon and select Properties.

12.

Select the Ports TAB.

13.

Verify that the IP Address in the Print to the following port list is the same as the one from the Print settings page. If necessary reselect the TCP/IP number used for your printer.

14.

Start an application and send a print job to the printer. If printer still does not print contact your Cutomer support representative.

W I N D O W S 52

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (DLC/LLC)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Verify these items in the Network Settings area of the Print

Settings page:

Connector Type: is set for Auto OR the specific type that you have used to connect the printer to your network.

Card Address: (Note this address for later use).

2.

Verify the following items in the Software and Memory area of the Print Settings page:

Interpreters: PCL or PostScript (depending on your driver).

3.

From a workstation desktop use the right mouse button and select

Network Neighborhood then with the left mouse button select

Properties from the cascade menu.

W I N D O W S 53

4.

The Network dialog will appear. Select the Protocols TAB.

5.

Check the list of installed network components for the following items:

DLC Protocol

6.

If you have elected to run CentreWare DP you must also have loaded Novell IntranetWare Client, Novell NetWare Client 32,

a Novell server on the network, and an NWLink IPX/SPX

Compatible transport protocol component. You may also discover printers that have been assigned a TCP/IP address.

7.

As required, install any components not listed and restart the system.

8.

Once rebooted, select the Start button and Settings, then select the Printers folder. The printers window will appear.

9.

Verify that you have selected the correct driver for your printer.

10.

Right mouse click on the Printer icon and select Properties.

11.

Select the Ports TAB.

12.

Verify that the port name in the Print to the following port list matches the name given when the printer was installed. If necessary reselect the correct name.

13.

Start an application and send a print job to the printer. If printer still does not print contact your Customer support representative.

W I N D O W S 54

Windows NT 4.0 Troubleshooting (AppleTalk)

This troubleshooting section assumes:

Your printer was purchased with a network interface card (NIC) installed OR you have installed, connected, and verified the operation of the network interface card using the procedures found in the Connecting to your Network chapter of this document.

You have loaded a DocuPrint C55/C55mp PCL or PostScript print driver.

You have printed and retained a current copy of the Print Settings page.

Procedure

1.

Verify these items in the General Information area of the Print

Settings page:

AppleTalk Name is correct.

2.

Verify these items in the Network Settings area of the Print

Settings page:

Connector Type is set for Auto OR the specific type that you have used to connect the printer to your network.

3.

Verify these items in the EtherTalk/TokenTalk area of the Print

Settings page:

Enabled: is set to Yes.

Phase: is set to the correct AppleTalk Phase (1 or 2).

Zone: contains the desired zone name or * (*=the network’s

Default Zone).

W I N D O W S 55

4.

Verify the following items in the Software and Memory area of the Print Settings page:

Interpreters: PCL or PostScript (depending on your driver).

5.

From the server desktop, use the right mouse button and select

Network Neighborhood then with the left mouse button select

Properties from the cascade menu.

6.

The Network dialog will appear. Select the Configuration TAB.

7.

Check the list of installed network components for the following items:

AppleTalk Protocol

8.

If you have elected to run CentreWare DP you must also have loaded Novell IntranetWare Client, Novell NetWare Client 32, a Novell server on the network, and an IPX/SPX Compatible

protocol component. You may also discover printers that have been assigned a TCP/IP address.

9.

As required, install any components not listed and restart the system.

10.

Once rebooted, select the Start button and Settings, then select the Printers folder. The printers window will appear.

11.

Verify that you have selected the correct driver for your printer.

12.

Right mouse click on the Printer icon and select Properties.

13.

Select the Ports TAB.

14.

Verify the AppleTalk name in the Print to the following port list.

If necessary reselect the correct name.

15.

Start an application and send a print job to the printer. If printer still does not print contact your Customer support representative.

Chapter 5

Macintosh Network Setup

M A C I N T O S H 1

M A C I N T O S H 2

Chapter Five Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 3

Purpose of this Chapter................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 3

Quick Step Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ . 4

Macintosh Software Installation............................................................................5

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 5

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 5

DocuPrint Software Installation for Macintosh Computers ................................ ...... 6

Step-by-Step Setup (AppleTalk) ................................ ................................ ................. 7

Configuring EtherTalk/TokenTalk at the Control Panel ................................ ........... 7

Selecting the DocuPrint Printer from the Chooser ................................ .................. 8

Macintosh Troubleshooting ................................................................................10

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 10

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 10

Macintosh Quick Check................................ ................................ ............................ 11

Macintosh Troubleshooting Step-by-Step ................................ ................................ . 12

M A C I N T O S H 3

Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to provide detailed information on

Software Installation, Configuration, Initial Testing, and

Troubleshooting of the DocuPrint printer for use on your network.

An experienced Systems Administrator would ordinarily perform this task.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to provide the required information to enable you to connect and set up your DocuPrint printer on your network using your specific workstation operating system.

Requirements

In general, the requirements needed for printer connection and setup include:

A workstation with the appropriate operating system software installed for that station.

A working knowledge of the operating system being used on your workstation.

A network card, or Serial port/LocalTalk Interface Option card installed in the DocuPrint printer, together with appropriate cabling to link the card to your network. Refer to the chapter entitled Printer Connection and Setup for details on network card and cabling information.

M A C I N T O S H 4

Quick Step Overview

1.

Configure the DocuPrint printer for use on an

EtherTalk/TokenTalk network from the Control Panel (if necessary).

2.

Install the Driver, PPD and Printer Utility software per the instructions provided in the Macintosh Software Installation section of this chapter.

3.

Select DocuPrint printer and zone (if used) in the Chooser.

4.

Print a test page from your software application.

5.

If you are not able to print, consult the Macintosh

Troubleshooting section of this chapter for information on your network configuration.

M A C I N T O S H 5

Macintosh Software Installation

Introduction

The Macintosh Software Installer supplied with your DocuPrint printer is designed to load your CentreWare application, printer driver and PPDs directly onto your Macintosh workstation with a minimum amount of operator intervention.

Requirements

A working knowledge of your Macintosh, 7.X or higher, operating system.

The DocuPrint Macintosh Software Disks.

Your system must have a least 6 Megabytes of RAM and at least

10 Megabytes of free hard disk space.

M A C I N T O S H 6

DocuPrint Software Installation for Macintosh

Computers

1.

At your workstation, insert the disk supplied with your documentation entitled DocuPrint Color Laser Printer Setup. A window should open showing the contents of the disk. If it does not, double click on the floppy disk icon on the desktop.

2.

Double click on the Install DocuPrint C55mp icon.

3.

If necessary, click Switch Disk until the name of the desired hard drive appears in the Destination Disk area.

4.

Click Install. As files are copied, the progress bar will continue across to the end.

5.

When completed, a dialog box will display the Installation

Successful message. Click Quit.

6.

Proceed to the section entitled Selecting the DocuPrint Printer

from the Chooser.

M A C I N T O S H 7

Step-by-Step Setup (AppleTalk)

Configuring EtherTalk/TokenTalk at the Control

Panel

The EtherTalk factory default settings are listed below:

If you do not need to change the default settings, proceed to the section entitled Selecting the DocuPrint Printer from the Chooser.

To change the settings, follow these steps:

1.

At the Control Panel, press the

On Line

button. Make sure that the LED above the button is

OFF

and the Control Panel says

offline

.

2.

Press

Menu

button. The

ON-LINE

message disappears and

TOP MENU

is displayed.

3.

Press the

Next

button until

<COMMUNICATIONS>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

4.

Press the

Next

button until

<NETWORK SETUP>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

5.

Press

Next

button until

<ETHERTALK>

or

<TOKENTALK>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

6.

Press the

Next

button until

<PHASE>

is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

7.

Press the

Next

button until your choice of (Phase) 1 or 2 is displayed and then press

ENTER

.

8.

Press

On Line

. Be sure that the light above it goes

ON

and the message in the window is

ON LINE

.

M A C I N T O S H 8

Selecting the DocuPrint Printer from the Chooser

NOTE: Before continuing, make sure that the software included with your customer documentation set has been loaded into each Macintosh computer that will be sending jobs to the DocuPrint printer.

Before you send a print job to the DocuPrint printer, make sure that it is selected as the current printer in the Chooser.

1.

Use the mouse and place the cursor over the APPLE menu in the upper left corner of the Desktop.

2.

Press the mouse button to make the Apple menu appear. DRAG the cursor down until it highlights the Chooser entry in the menu, then release the mouse button. This will launch the Chooser.

3.

In the left side of the Chooser, click on the DocuPrint C55mp driver icon to select it. You may have to use the scroll bars to locate the icon.

NOTE: Your network may be divided into AppleTalk Zones. If

AppleTalk zones exist on your current network connection, then a list of available AppleTalk zones will appear in the Chooser window.

Identify, then select the zone in which the DocuPrint printer is located.

4.

When you select a zone, printer names appear in the box named:

Select a PostScript Printer. The default name is DocuPrint

C55.

5.

Select DocuPrint C55 from the Select a PostScript Printer window if it is not already selected by default.

6.

Click Setup...

M A C I N T O S H 9

FOR FIRST TIME INSTALLATIONS

The driver will auto setup. When this procedure is finished you will be returned to the Select a PostScript Printer window.

7. Highlight the PPD for your DocuPrint model printer. Click

Select.

8. Go to Step 12.

FOR RECONFIGURATION OF EXISTING PRINTERS

9. Click on Select PPD. The window displays a list of PostScript

Printer Description files.

10. Highlight the PPD file for DocuPrint C55mp.

11. Click Select.

12. Click OK when finished.

13. Make sure that AppleTalk is active, then close the window to exit the Chooser.

Macintosh Troubleshooting

M A C I N T O S H 10

Introduction

The steps in this procedure should eliminate cabling, communication, and connection problems.

Complete these steps, then run a test print from your software application. If the job prints, no further system troubleshooting will be necessary.

For problems with the appearance of your document once it has printed, consult the Print Defect Troubleshooting chapter of the

DocuPrint User’s Guide.

Requirements

A workstation with the appropriate DocuPrint print driver installed (CentreWare DP software recommended).

A working knowledge of the operating system (System 7.X or greater) being used on your workstation.

A NIC card (Ethernet or Token Ring), or Serial port/LocalTalk

Interface Option installed in your printer, with proper cabling.

M A C I N T O S H 11

Macintosh Quick Check

1.

Start the Chooser from the Apple menu.

2.

Be certain to select the correct zone to which the printer is attached and then select the DocuPrint C55mp driver icon.

3.

If the printer name appears, your printer is communicating properly. You do not need to perform any of the checks outlined in this section.

4.

If your printer name does not appear, proceed to the section entitled Macintosh Troubleshooting Step-by-Step.

M A C I N T O S H 12

Macintosh Troubleshooting Step-by-Step

ETHERNET CONNECTION STEPS:

1.

VERIFY that the printer is plugged in, turned on, and connected to an active Ethernet or LocalTalk network.

2.

CHECK for, and correct, any error code conditions indicated on the Control Panel display. A complete list of Error Codes, and their definitions, are contained in this Technical Information

Guide in the chapter entitled Error Codes.

3.

VERIFY cable connection to the NIC from the Ethernet network.

(BNC connections should have the locking pins of the plug snapped into the slots of the jack. RJ45 connections should be fully inserted and the locking clip engaged.)

4.

VERIFY that the Network Interface Card is receiving network traffic by monitoring the LEDs on the back of the DocuPrint printer NIC. When the DocuPrint NIC is connected to a functioning network receiving traffic, its link LED will be green, and its traffic LED will be flashing rapidly.

5.

Print out the DocuPrint Print Settings page. Details on this are located in the chapter entitled Connecting to your Network.

Review the EtherTalk section of the settings sheet. This step verifies whether the DocuPrint printer recognizes the NIC card and is reading parameters from the non-volatile RAM located on the NIC. If no information is present regarding the NIC, this would indicate that the NIC is improperly installed or damaged.

6.

From the Control Panel, CHECK the Connector setting under the

Ethernet menu. This setting must either match the type of connection you have made to the NIC (BNC or RJ45), or be set to

Auto to switch between both connectors.

7.

From the Control Panel, VERIFY that EtherTalk is enabled. If not, enable it in the Control Panel and reset the printer.

8.

From the Control Panel, CHECK the EtherTalk Phase. Be sure it matches the phase type on your network.

9.

From the Control Panel, VERIFY the Zone. If you have multiple zones on your network, be certain your printer is set to advertise in the desired zone.

M A C I N T O S H 13

10.

From the Control Panel, CHECK the Mode entry. It must be set to either PostScript or Auto-Select to correctly accept print jobs from Macintosh computers.

11.

From the Control Panel, RESET the printer and allow it to process and go back ON-LINE.

12.

If the above steps fail to fix the Network Print problem, contact

Xerox Customer Service.

LOCALTALK NETWORK STEPS:

1.

VERIFY that the printer is plugged in, turned on, and connected to an active Ethernet of LocalTalk network.

2.

CHECK for, and correct, any error code conditions indicated on the Control Panel display. A complete list of Error Codes, and their definitions, are contained in this Technical Information

Guide in the chapter entitled Error Codes.

3.

Verify the cable connection to the LocalTalk connector. (If you are using PhoneNet, then make sure that ports on the PhoneNet box are not empty. Empty ports on the PhoneNet connector should have a terminator in it.)

4.

Print out the DocuPrint Print Settings page. Details on this are located in the chapter entitled Connecting to your Network.

Review the LocalTalk settings area of the Settings page. This step verifies that LocalTalk is enabled and that the SLIC card I properly installed. If the settings say “Not Installed”, then this indicates that the SLIC card is improperly installed, damaged, or missing.

5.

From the Control Panel, check the LocalTalk setting under the

Communications menu. Verify that LocalTalk is enabled. If not, enable it in the Control Panel and reset the printer.

6.

From the Control Panel, RESET the printer and allow it to process and go back ON-LINE.

7.

If the above steps fail to fix the Network Print problem, contact

Xerox Customer Service.

Chapter 6

UNIX Network Setup

U N I X 1

U N I X 2

Chapter Six Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 3

Quick Step Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ . 4

UNIX Software Installation ...............................................................................6

SOLARIS 1.1X , 2.X Step-by-Step Setup................................ ................................ .... 6

Other UNIX versions Quick Step Overview ................................ ................................ 8

Other UNIX versions Step-by-Step Setup ................................ ................................ ... 9

Print Queue Management................................................................................11

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 11

Printing Model: Workstation to Printer ................................ ................................ ...... 12

Printing Model: Workstation to Print Server ................................ .............................. 14

DocuPrint UNIX Command Line Utilities................................ ................................ ... 16

Removing a DocuPrint printer ................................ ................................ .................. 19

Administration .................................................................................................20

DocuPrint Parameters Configurable via Telnet ................................ ......................... 21

To Use Telnet ................................ ................................ ................................ .......... 24

The Telnet Console Main Menu................................ ................................ ................ 25

Remote NIC Configuration ................................ ................................ ....................... 26

Telnet Menu System (exploded)................................ ................................ ............... 28

UNIX Troubleshooting.....................................................................................40

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 40

UNIX Troubleshooting Quick Check ................................ ................................ ......... 41

UNIX Troubleshooting Step-by-Step ................................ ................................ ......... 42

U N I X 3

Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to outline the connection and configuration of your DocuPrint printer for use on your network.

This task would ordinarily be performed by an experienced Systems

Administrator.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to provide the required information to enable you to connect and set up your DocuPrint printer on your network using your specific UNIX workstation operating system.

Requirements

A workstation with the appropriate operating system software installed for that station.

Advanced knowledge of one of the UNIX operating systems listed below:

1.

Solaris 1.1X (SunOS)

2.

Solaris 2.X (Solaris)

3.

HPUX

4.

AIX

5.

Silicon Graphics (SGI UNIX)

6.

Other UNIX versions

A network card installed in the DocuPrint printer, together with appropriate cabling to link the card to your network. Refer to the chapter entitled Connecting To Your Network for network card installation and cabling information.

U N I X 4

Quick Step Overview

1.

Verify physical cable connections from your printer to the network.

2.

Configure your TCP/IP environment and the DocuPrint printer so that they can communicate with each other. Perform the following procedures contained in the chapter entitled Connecting

to your network.

Set An IP Address (Static or Dynamic)

Setting a SUBNET MASK at the Control Panel (optional)

Setting up AppSocket (optional)

Setting the DEFAULT GATEWAY (optional)

Printing the Print Settings page

3.

Install the DocuPrint printer driver on the server or station by

ONE of the following methods:

Floppy Disk Install

Network Install

U N I X 5

4.

Configure your UNIX workstation for any of the following print models:

Workstation to a direct connected parallel printer.

Workstation to a remote print server.

5.

Create desired print queues.

6.

Send a print job to your printer.

7.

Check the print job for print quality. If print quality problems exist, use the print quality section of your User Guide to correct the problem.

8.

If your print job did not print, see the section entitled UNIX

Troubleshooting .

U N I X 6

UNIX Software Installation

SOLARIS 1.1X , 2.X Step-by-Step Setup

1.

Verify physical cable connections from your printer to the network.

2.

Assign the DocuPrint printer an IP Address at the Control Panel.

3.

Add your DocuPrint printer’s TCP/IP address and hostname to your NIS database. For non-NIS networks, add the TCP/IP address and hostname to your machine’s /etc/hosts table.

4.

Verify IP connectivity with the UNIX “ping” command.

5.

TYPE: ping <printer_hostname> [ENTER].

NOTE: To print, the ping command MUST return

<printer_hostname> is alive. If it does not, then proceed to the

TCP/IP Troubleshooting section of this chapter.

6.

Insert DocuPrint PostScript Print Tool installation diskette #1 into the floppy drive of your system.

U N I X 7

7.

To run the installation script:

From a command line, TYPE:

cd /tmp [ENTER] bar xvfp /dev/rfd0 [ENTER]

XeroxDocuPrintInstall/setup [ENTER]

From a command line, TYPE:

volcheck [ENTER] cd /tmp [ENTER] cp /floppy/floppy0/setup . [ENTER]

./setup [ENTER]

8.

Follow setup instructions to install the DocuPrint PostScript Print

Tool. When the installation is complete, setup will automatically launch the Xpadmin configuration tool.

9.

Review the Installation Overviews for Solaris and Non-Solaris

UNIX systems in this chapter to decide how you wish your

DocuPrint printer to be connected. Possible configurations are:

Direct Connect (parallel port)

Network (Remote network printer)

Network (Remote network Spooler)

Network (Configuring a Remote print Spooler)

Other UNIX versions Quick Step Overview

U N I X 8

1.

Verify physical cable connections from your printer to the network.

2.

Configure your TCP/IP environment and the DocuPrint printer so that they can communicate with each other. Perform the following procedures contained in the chapter entitled Connecting

to your network.

Set An IP Address (Static or Dynamic)

Setting a SUBNET MASK at the Control Panel

Setting up AppSocket

Printing the Print Settings page

U N I X 9

Other UNIX versions Step-by-Step Setup

1.

Verify physical cable connections from your printer to the network.

2.

Assign the DocuPrint printer an IP Address at the Control Panel.

3.

Add your DocuPrint printer’s TCP/IP address and hostname to your NIS database. For non-NIS networks, add the TCP/IP address and hostname to your machine’s /etc/hosts table. Verify

IP connectivity with the UNIX “ping” command.

4.

TYPE: ping <printer_hostname> [ENTER].

NOTE: To print, the “ping” command MUST return

<printer_hostname> is alive. If it does not, then proceed to the

TCP/IP Troubleshooting section of this chapter.

U N I X 10

CHOOSE YOUR UNIX VARIETY AND PERFORM THE

FOLLOWING STEPS:

BERKELEY BSD UNIX:

Add the following entry to the /etc/printcap file (as root). Use “ps” for Remote Printer entry (case sensitive); printer_hostname is host entry for the print_queue:

print_queue:\

:lp=:\

:rm=printer_hostname:\

:rp=ps:\

:sd=/var/spool/print_queue:\

SYSTEM 5 UNIX:

Use the following lp command sequence (as root). Use “ps” for

“Remote Printer” entry (case sensitive). printer_hostname is host entry for the print_queue:

/sbin/sh

/usr/sbin/lpshut

/usr/sbin/lpsystem -t bsd printer_hostname

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p print_queue -

I

any -s printer_hostname!ps

/usr/lib/lp/lpsched

/usr/sbin/accept print_queue

/usr/sbin/enable print_queue

U N I X 11

Print Queue Management

Introduction

The section of the document guides you step-by-step through the installation of a new printer. It is recommended that you use

CentreWare DP Setup Wizard to initially configure your printer. You may set up your printer to be accessed with different printing models.

These models are as follows:

Workstation to Printer - This printing model is used to spool print jobs in a queue on your local workstation then send them to the printer. You must also use this model at a remote workstation that will act as a print server.

Workstation to Print Server - This printing model is used to spool print jobs to a queue on a remote workstation (or a printer itself ).

U N I X 12

Printing Model: Workstation to Printer

Overview

Run the Xerox Printer Administration Tool to configure your client to print to a network-connected DocuPrint printer.

NOTE: A network connected printer is a DocuPrint printer that has the Network Interface Card (NIC) installed and connected to a functioning network.

Steps

NOTE: The following instructions assume you have correctly completed the DocuPrint software installation.

NOTE: Read the Installation Overview for your variety of UNIX and select how your DocuPrint printer will be connected BEFORE you perform the following procedures.

1.

Become superuser. Run the Xerox Printer Administration Tool.

2.

TYPE: xpadmin -tty [ENTER]

U N I X 13

3.

From the Xerox Printer Administration Tool...

Xerox Printer Administration Tool

1) Add a Printer

2) Remove an existing printer(s).

e) Exit

Existing printer list:

Enter option or h for help:

4.

TYPE: 1 [ENTER]

5.

From the Add a Printer menu...

Add a Printer

1) Setup the printer name (queue name) []

2) Setup printer model ................ [1. DocuPrint

C55/C55MP PS v1.10]

3) Setup printing model ............... [1. workstation to printer]

4) Setup printer connection ........... [1. TCP/IP]

5) Setup the printer's host name ...... []

9) Setup user interface ............... [3. TTY]

10) Setup TTY features ................. [1. default features]

11) Setup banner page printing ......... [2. enabled]

12) Set as default printer ............. [1. No]

13) Setup daemon to use for printing ... [1. XPrintD]

a) Apply settings c) Cancel

Enter option or h for help:

6.

TYPE: 3 [RETURN] until the printing model indicates

“workstation to printer”.

7.

Enter a menu option number to toggle through the available settings for any other item you wish to change. When the desired settings for all options are reached, apply the settings to the printer using the “a” option in the menu.

U N I X 14

Printing Model: Workstation to Print Server

Overview

You need to be a superuser to use the following procedures. Run the

Xerox Printer Administration Tool to configure your client to print to a remote printer.

Steps

NOTE: The following instructions assume you have correctly completed the DocuPrint software installation.

1.

Become a superuser. Run the Xerox Printer Administration Tool.

2.

From the directory into which you installed the DocuPrint software,

TYPE: xpadmin -tty [ENTER]

U N I X 15

3.

From the Xerox Printer Administration Tool...

Xerox Printer Administration Tool

1) Add a Printer

2) Remove an existing printer(s).

e) Exit

Existing printer list:

Enter option or h for help:

4.

TYPE: 1 [ENTER]

5.

From the Add a Printer menu...

Add a Printer

1) Setup the printer name (queue name) []

2) Setup printer model ................ [1. DocuPrint

C55/C55MP PS v1.10]

3) Setup printing model ............... [1. workstation to printer]

4) Setup printer connection ........... [1. TCP/IP]

5) Setup the printer's host name ...... []

9) Setup user interface ............... [3. TTY]

10) Setup TTY features ................. [1. default features]

11) Setup banner page printing ......... [2. enabled]

12) Set as default printer ............. [1. No]

13) Setup daemon to use for printing ... [1. XPrintD]

a) Apply settings c) Cancel

Enter option or h for help:

6.

TYPE: 3 [RETURN] until the printing model indicates

“workstation to print server”.

7.

Enter a menu option number to toggle through the available settings for any other item you wish to change. When the desired settings for all options are reached, apply the settings to the printer using the “a” option in the menu.

DocuPrint UNIX Command Line Utilities

U N I X 16

XPQ

OVERVIEW

This utility is an equivalent utility to the UNIX lpq command. It allows the user to view the current job list for DocuPrint print queues.

This program executes and continues to run and update the screen until you exit by typing ^C (Control key + C)

XPQ can be run by any user to monitor print jobs.

USAGE

xpq [print_queue_name] [interval]

Where:

[print_queue_name]

= DocuPrint queue name to monitor

[interval]

= Desired time between screen updates (in seconds)

U N I X 17

XPRM

OVERVIEW

XPRM can be run by a ROOT user to delete ANY print jobs.

XPRM can be run by any user to delete ONLY their print jobs.

This utility is an equivalent to the UNIX lprm command. It allows the user to delete jobs currently in a DocuPrint job queue. Before using lprm, run the DocuPrint utility lpq for the desired queue and note the job number of the print job you want to delete.

USAGE

xprm [print_queue_name] [job_number]

WHERE:

[print_queue_name]

= queue name containing print job to delete.

[job_number]

= Job number of the print job to delete.

U N I X 18

XPMV

OVERVIEW

XPMV can be used by the ROOT user to administer ALL print jobs.

XPMV can be used by any user to administer ONLY their own print jobs.

This utility allows the user to move jobs between DocuPrint print queues.

Before using XPMV, run the DocuPrint utility xpq for the desired queue and note the job number of the print job you want to move.

You will also need the DocuPrint queue names for both the source and destination queues.

USAGE

xpmv [source_queue_name] [dest_queue_name] [job_number]

WHERE:

[source_queue_name]

= Queue where the print job to be moved exists.

[dest_queue_name]

= Queue where the print job will be placed.

[job_number]

= Job number to be moved (separate multiple job numbers with spaces).

The command above will move a specific print job from the source queue to the destination queue.

ALTERNATIVE OPTIONS:

xpmv [source_queue_name] [dest_queue_name] [ - ]

[ - ] = Hyphen enables ALL jobs in the DocuPrint queue to be moved

xpmv [source_queue_name] [dest_queue_name] [ - ] [username]

[ - ] [username] = will move ALL jobs submitted by a specific user.

U N I X 19

Removing a DocuPrint printer

Overview

Run the Xerox Printer Administration Tool to remove a printer configuration from your workstation or remote print spooler.

Steps

NOTE: The following instructions assume you have correctly completed the software installation. You will need to know the complete path to the installation directory or have added it to your search path to continue.

1.

Become superuser. Run the Xerox Printer Administration Tool.

2.

TYPE: xpadmin [ENTER]

3.

From the Xerox Printer Administration Tool ...

Xerox Printer Administration Tool

1) Add a Printer

2) Remove an existing printer(s).

e) Exit

Existing printer list:

Enter option or h for help:

4.

TYPE: 2 [ENTER]

5.

Enter the name of the printer configuration you wish removed or enter a “-” (hyphen) to remove ALL printers.

6.

The printer configuration(s) will be removed.

U N I X 20

Administration

Overview

TCP/IP and lpr on the DocuPrint C55/C55mp can be administrated in a number of different ways:

Telnet

CentreWare DP (Requires a Windows-based workstation. Details are in the section entitled CentreWare DP Software

Instructions.).

Control Panel (Details for this will be contained in your printer’s

User Guide.).

Internet Services HTML-based utility. See the chapter entitled

Internet Printer Services.

It is recommended that you evaluate your environment to decide which administration utility best suits your needs.

U N I X 21

DocuPrint Parameters Configurable via Telnet

The DocuPrint printer allows most of its Network Card (NIC) parameters to be viewed and set using Telnet. The printer NIC can also be remotely reset or initialized using Telnet. The following is a summary of Telnet configurable NIC parameters:

Protocol Settings

TCP/IP

ip address (can be hard coded: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

ip security (can be set up by ip address and even by ip subnet #’s)

LPD (“Line Printer Daemon” enabled/disabled)

LPR Banner Pages (yes/no -- Enables / Disables LPR banner pages)

IPX

Netware (Enables/Disables IPX Pserver)

Ethernet Type (IPX packet frametype settings)

Primary Netware Server (NetWare server storing print queue and pserver information)

Netware Printer Name (name NIC uses to advertise itself and attach to Netware queues)

Queue Scan Rate (time interval that the printer waits before it polls it’s queue(s) for print jobs)

U N I X 22

Protocol Settings (continued)

APPLETALK

EtherTalk or TokenTalk (enabled/disabled)

NETBEUI

NetBEUI Group (workgroup that the printer displays itself in)

NetBEUI Name (name printer displays itself as)

Service Name (name advertised on Microsoft NetBEUI network)

Service Description (text description of printer)

Service Password (password used on Microsoft NetBEUI network)

U N I X 23

NIC Settings

ETHERNET

Connector Type (BNC, RJ45, Auto Select)

TOKENRING

Connector Type (DB9, RJ45, Auto Select)

Ring Speed (4mbs, 16mbs)

Routing (yes/no -- source routing: enabled/disabled)

Card Address (Token Ring physical address can be set)

Reset Printer (yes/no -- resets NIC and enables any NIC changes)

Reset network card settings to factory defaults (yes/no -- resets

NIC to default settings)

Read Only Settings

The following is a list of displayable NIC parameters (Read Only):

NIC Firmware Revision (NIC’s firmware revision)

Processor Speed (NIC processor speed)

Ethernet Address (physical layer address)

U N I X 24

To Use Telnet

At any Telnet client (UNIX, WFW3.11, NT, DOS, ...) Telnet to port

2002 of the printer.

NOTE: Telnet will work only if the TCP/IP protocol stack is loaded

AND it supports Telnet.

NOTE: In the following examples, the expression

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX refers to the IP address of your printer. You may also substitute the hostname if it is known.

Starting TELNET

UNIX

At the Command prompt, TYPE: telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 2002

[ENTER]

WINDOWS NT

At the Command prompt, TYPE: telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 2002

[ENTER]

WFW3.11 (WITH MICROSOFT’S WIN32S TCP/IP

STACK)

At the Command prompt, TYPE: telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 2002

[ENTER]

U N I X 25

The Telnet Console Main Menu

Checking Printer Status

Telnet offers a very quick way to determine printer status remotely via

TCP/IP. Once connected to the printer maintenance port (2002), realtime status can be viewed remotely in the Telnet console screen. If the printer is idle, you can poll the printer by typing “s” at the Telnet console.

Example

In the following example, the printer is printing a job from host

13.231.30.3 :

1.

At the Command prompt, TYPE: telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

2002 [ENTER]

2.

The system will attempt to connect to the host. You will see:

Trying XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Escape character is ‘^]’

Telnet Console on

Type “S” to see current status

Type “!” to enter monitor

3.

TYPE: s [ENTER]

TCP socket job active on port from host 13.231.30.3

status: busy; source: AppSocket

TCP/IP job finished

U N I X 26

Remote NIC Configuration

To remotely configure the printer using Telnet, you can enter

“maintenance mode” by typing “!” at the Telnet console.

NOTE: You can get help while in maintenance mode by typing “h” at the maintenance mode main menu.

NOTE: You MUST reset the NIC in the printer after going into maintenance mode. You can do this in Telnet by using the R option.

Maintenance mode example

The following is an example of entering “maintenance mode” :

1.

At the Command prompt TYPE:

telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 2002 [ENTER]

2.

The system will attempt to connect to the host. You will see:

Trying XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Escape character is ‘^]’

Telnet Console on

Type “S” to see current status

Type “!” to enter monitor

3.

TYPE: ! [ENTER]

Warning: entering the monitor will lock out other Ethernet access.

Type “yes” to continue.

4.

TYPE: yes [ENTER]

Ready for command...

Command [D,E,I,L,N,R,Z] -->

U N I X 27

Maintenance mode with HELP example

The following is an example of entering “maintenance mode”, then getting help :

1.

At the Command prompt TYPE:

telnet XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 2002 [ENTER]

2.

The system will attempt to connect to the host. You will see:

Trying XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Connected to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Escape character is ‘^]’

Telnet Console on

Type “S” to see current status

Type “!” to enter monitor

3.

TYPE: ! [ENTER]

Warning: entering the monitor will lock out other Ethernet access.

Type “yes” to continue.

4.

TYPE: yes [ENTER]

Ready for command...

Command [D,E,I,L,N,R,Z] -->h

-- Available options ---

C Configure console for status monitoring

D Display network interface settings

E Set Ethernet options

I Set IP number

L Limit Access by IP number

N Set Network Protocol options

R Reset Printer

Z Reset network card settings to factory defaults

Command [D,E,I,L,N,C,R,Z] -->

U N I X 28

Telnet Menu System (exploded)

This section of the document explains the Telnet menu system. Once you have connected to the printer and started the console session, type

“h” to see this help menu:

Ready for command...

Command [D,E,I,L,N,R,Z] -->h

-- Available options ---

C Configure console for status monitoring

D Display network interface settings

E Set Ethernet options

I Set IP number

L Limit Access by IP number

N Set Network Protocol options

R Reset Printer

Z Reset network card settings to factory defaults

Command [D,E,I,L,N,C,R,Z] -->

The items contained in this menu are detailed in this section. After each menu item letter are the parameters or submenus which it supports.

U N I X 29

C Configure console (for status monitoring)

1.

Select the C option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Config console for status monitoring

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

2.

Select desired option and press [RETURN]. You will be returned to the Main menu.

D Display network interface settings

1.

This command will display a list of parameters regarding the configuration of the network interface card in your printer and return to the Main menu.

E Set Ethernet options

1.

Select the E option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Ethernet connector Auto Select override

1 (BNC)

2 (RJ45)

3 (Do not override)

2.

Enter the desired option or “3” to make no changes and press

[RETURN]. The next Ethernet Option will be displayed:

Telnet Security

1 (Off)

2 (On/New Password)

3 (No Change)

3.

Enter the desired option or “3” to make no changes and press

[RETURN]. If option 2 was selected you will be prompted to enter a new password the you will be returned to the Main menu.

U N I X 30

I Set IP number

This menu option is a single line-entry command.

1.

To set the IP address TYPE:

I XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX [RETURN]

2.

Where XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the desired IP address.

3.

When enter is pressed the printer will update it’s IP address..

You will be returned to the Main menu.

L Limit Access by IP number

1.

Select the L option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

IP security currently (disabled/enabled)

IP security option

1 (Delete entry)

2 (Add address)

3 (Add subnet)

4 (Done)

2.

Select the desired option number to change the access privileges.

3.

When finished select option 4 to exit and save the changes you have made.. You will be returned to the Main menu.

U N I X 31

N Set Network Protocols Options

The Set Network Protocols Options menu has the following submenus:

A SET APPLE ETHERTALK OPTIONS

1.

Select the A option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable EtherTalk?, yes or no (y or n)?: (y/n)

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. You will be returned to the Set Network Protocols Options menu.

L SET LPD (REMOTE PRINTER QUEUES) OPTIONS

1.

Select the L option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable LPD?, yes or no (y or n)?: (y/n)

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. You will be returned to the Set Network Protocols Options menu.

U N I X 32

N SET NETWARE OPTIONS

1.

Select the N option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable Netware?, yes or no (y or n)?: (y/n)

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. If the N option was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Set Ethernet Type (Ethernet II, 802.3, 802.2, SNAP)

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

3.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If option

2 was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Ethernet types

1 (Auto Select)

2 (802.3)

3 (Ethernet II)

4 (802.2)

5 (SNAP)

U N I X 33

4.

Select the desired option then press [RETURN]. The printer will return the following prompt:

Set Novell queue scan interval

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

5.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If option

2 was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Enter Queue scan rate (between 1 & 255 seconds):

6.

Enter the desired scan rate in seconds then press [RETURN]. the printer will return the following prompt:

Set primary NetWare server

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

7.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If option

2 was selected.the printer will return the following prompt:

Enter primary server name

U N I X 34

8.

Enter the desired primary server name then press [RETURN], he printer will return the following prompt:

Set Novell broadcast name

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

9.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If option

2 was selected,the printer will return the following prompt:

Enter netware broadcast name

10.

Enter the desired broadcast name then press [RETURN]. the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable Netware Directory Services ?, yes or no (y or n)?:

11.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. If the N option was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Set NDS Tree name

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

U N I X 35

12.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If the 2 option was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Enter NDS Tree name

13.

Enter the desired NDS Tree name then press [RETURN]. the printer will return the following prompt:

Set NDS Context name

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

14.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN]. If the 2 option was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Enter NDS Context name

15.

Enter the desired NDS Context name then press [RETURN].

You will be returned to the Set Network Protocols Options menu.

U N I X 36

P SET PC NETWORK (NETBEUI) OPTIONS

1.

Select the P option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable PC Network (Netbios)?, yes or no (y or n)?: (y/n)

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. If the N option was selected, the printer will return the following prompt:

Set PC network (NetBEUI) Group

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

3.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN].

4.

If the 2 option was selected, enter the desired NetBEUI group name and press [RETURN], the printer will return the following prompt:

Set PC network (NetBEUI) Name

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

5.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN].

U N I X 37

6.

If the 2 option was selected, enter the desired NetBEUI name and press [RETURN], the printer will return the following prompt:

Set PC network (NetBEUI) Service

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

7.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN].

8.

If the 2 option was selected, enter the desired NetBEUI Service name and press [RETURN], the printer will return the following prompt:

Set PC network (NetBEUI) Description

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

9.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN].

10.

If the 2 option was selected, enter the desired NetBEUI

Description and press [RETURN], the printer will return the following prompt:

Set PC network (NetBEUI) Password

1 (No)

2 (Yes)

11.

Select the desired option 1 or 2 then press [RETURN].

12.

If the 2 option was selected, enter the desired NetBEUI Password and press [RETURN].You will be returned to the Set Network

Protocols Options menu.

U N I X 38

T SET TCP SOCKETS OPTIONS

1.

Select the T option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable TCP Sockets (fpfilter)?, yes or no (y or n)?: (y/n)

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. You will be returned to the Set Network Protocols Options menu.

D SET MICROSOFT NT DLC OPTIONS

1.

Select the D option from the menu and the printer will return the following prompt:

Disable NTDLC printing?, yes or no (y or n)?:

2.

Select the desired option Y or N then press [RETURN]. You will be returned to the Set Network Protocols Options menu.

X RETURN TO MAIN MENU

1.

Select the X option from the menu and you will be returned to the

Main Menu.

U N I X 39

R Reset Printer

When the R option is selected the printer will reset and the Telnet session will be interrupted.

Z Reset network card settings to factory defaults

When the Z option is selected the printer network interface card values will be reset and the Telnet session will be interrupted.

U N I X 40

UNIX Troubleshooting

Introduction

This chapter contains general troubleshooting tips which should solve the problems which could possibly occur during a UNIX installation.

Because of the varieties of UNIX available, the steps covered here are general in nature.

This chapter is broken down into three parts.

TCP/IP Communication problems to identify network specific and TCP/IP specific errors.

PostScript Print Tool Printing Problems designed to troubleshoot the software installation.

lpr and lp printing problems addressing the print model problems.

Installation problems usually center around the Ethernet cabling and the TCP/IP protocol. This chapter will also outline the troubleshooting necessary to correct these situations.

U N I X 41

UNIX Troubleshooting Quick Check

1.

CHECK for LED activity on the back of the NIC card. One LED should be on at all times and another should be flickering with network activity. If there is LED activity, this would indicate the cabling is correct for operation.

2.

VERIFY cable connection to the NIC from the Ethernet network.

(BNC connections should have the locking pins of the jack snapped into the slots of the plug. RJ45 connections should be fully inserted and the locking clip engaged.)

3.

Use the Control Panel on the front of the DocuPrint printer and print the Print Settings page. On this page verify that the NIC card has been set to a specific TCP/IP address or is set to use a

RARP or BOOTP server to be dynamically allocated an IP address. Check to be sure of the Hostname or IP address on the

Print Settings page.

4.

Try to “ping” the DocuPrint printer using the IP address assigned. If you get a response, send a known good print job to the printer. If no job prints, proceed to the section entitled UNIX

Troubleshooting Step-by-Step.

U N I X 42

UNIX Troubleshooting Step-by-Step

TCP/IP Communication Problems

1.

Verify that the DocuPrint printer is turned on and connected to a functioning network port. Check the DocuPrint printer NIC

LEDs for activity.

2.

At a command line prompt, TYPE ping xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx

(xxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx is the IP address of the DocuPrint printer).

Try to “ping” the DocuPrint printer using its hostname. If ping is successful with the DocuPrint printer’s TCP/IP address, then you have a local workstation or NIS configuration problem.

3.

Add the printer host name to your local hosts file or NIS database

(whichever applies) and retry the communications test. If all of the above fails, continue with step 4.

4.

Try to ping other TCP/IP nodes on your network. This will verify the operation of your workstation’s network card. Try to

“ping” the DocuPrint printer from another workstation. If all of the above fails, you have a configuration problem at your local workstation. You may also have a network problem.

U N I X 43

5.

If you suspect that the cause of the communications problem is the DocuPrint printer, print out a Print Settings page at the printer’s Control Panel and view the TCP/IP parameters.

6.

If Dynamic IP Addressing is enabled (DEFAULT) try “hard coding” the DocuPrint printer IP address at the control panel.

Reset the printer, and check for connectivity again with the

“ping” command.

7.

If Dynamic IP Addressing is disabled, verify the following settings on the Print Settings page with your local TCP/IP address administrator. This person should be able to verify the correctness of:

IP address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Any one of these important TCP/IP parameters (if set incorrectly) can cause TCP/IP communication problems. Subnet Mask and

Default Gateway are critical on multi-network segment

LAN/WAN’s. If you make any TCP/IP configuration changes, then the DocuPrint printer must be reset for those changes to take effect.

8.

If all of the above troubleshooting fails, you may have a malfunctioning NIC. Try a Factory Reset at the DocuPrint printer Control Panel. Manually set the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway at the DocuPrint printer Control Panel.

Reset the printer. Try to ping the printer again. If the problem persists, call Xerox Technical Support for further instructions.

U N I X 44

PostScript Print Tool Printing Problems

1.

VERIFY that the printer is turned on and connected to a functioning network port. Check the printer NIC LEDs for activity. The Link LED should be ON steady, while the Traffic

LED will flicker with activity.

2.

At a workstation command line prompt type “ping hostname command (where hostname is the hostname of the printer as it appears in your local /etc/hosts file or your NIS domain host database. If the “ping” command returns a time-out or failure you have a communication problem with the printer NIC. Refer to the TCP/IP Communication Problems section and continue your diagnostics there.

3.

If you are using indirect spooling to print to the printer, VERIFY that the remote workstation is up and running and can communicate with the printer NIC.

4.

If you are spooling directly to the DocuPrint printer, VERIFY that you can communicate with the printer. Again, use the ping command.

5.

If the communications test is successful, you may have a configuration problem at the DocuPrint printer. VERIFY that

LPD is enabled on the printer. The default setting is YES.

6.

Use the DocuPrint UNIX software to reinstall a new printer. If this still fails, call Xerox Technical Support for further instructions.

U N I X 45

lpr and lp (NON DocuPrint) Printing Problems

1.

VERIFY that the printer is turned on and connected to a functioning network port. Check the printer NIC LEDs for activity. The Link LED should be ON steady while the Traffic

LED will flicker with activity.

2.

At any workstation command line prompt, use the ping hostname command (where hostname is the hostname of the printer as it appears in your local /etc/hosts file or your NIS domain host database. If the “ping” command returns a time-out or failure, you have a communication problem with the printer NIC. Go to the TCP/IP Communication Problems section and continue your diagnostics there.

3.

If you are using indirect spooling to print to the DocuPrint printer, VERIFY that the remote workstation is up and running and can communicate with the DocuPrint printer NIC.

4.

If you are spooling directly to the DocuPrint printer, verify that you can communicate with the DocuPrint printer. Again use the

“ping” command.

5.

If the communications test is successful, you may have a configuration problem at the DocuPrint printer. Verify that LPD is enabled on the DocuPrint printer. The default setting is YES.

6.

If all of the above is successful, and you still cannot print, then you may have a configuration problem at your local workstation.

7.

If nothing works and you still have a problem, call Xerox

Technical Support for further instructions.

Chapter 7

OS/2 Network Setup

O S / 2 1

O S / 2 2

Chapter Seven Contents

Chapter Introduction................................ ................................ ................................ ... 3

Purpose of this Chapter................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 3

Compatibility ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 4

Network Operating Systems ................................ ................................ ................... 4

Required OS/2 FIXPACKS ................................ ................................ ..................... 4

Quick Step (OS/2 Warp Server v 4.0) ................................ ................................ ........ 5

Quick Install Setup ................................ ................................ ................................ . 5

Troubleshooting ................................ ................................ ................................ ..... 5

Step-by-Step Setup for IBM TCP/IP for OS/2 ................................ ............................. 7

TCP/IP Protocol Configuration ................................ ................................ ............... 7

OS/2 Software Installation .................................................................................8

Installing the DocuPrint OS/2 Print Driver................................ ................................ ... 8

OS/2 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................9

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 9

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 9

OS/2 Quick Check................................ ................................ ................................ .... 10

TCP/IP for OS/2 Versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0 ................................ .......................... 10

OS/2 Troubleshooting Step-by-Step ................................ ................................ ......... 11

OS/2 Warp V4.0. OS/2 Warp V3.0 (all versions) Warp Server, Lan Server 4.0, &

Warp Connect using TCP/IP for OS/2 Versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0 ........................ 11

Where do I go from here? ................................ ................................ ........................ 13

O S / 2 3

Chapter Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to outline the connection and configuration of your DocuPrint printer for use on your network.

This task would ordinarily be performed by an experienced Systems

Administrator.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to provide the required compatibility, configuration, print driver installation, and troubleshooting information to enable you to successfully connect and set up your

DocuPrint printer on your network using your specific workstation operating system.

Requirements

Working knowledge of OS/2 and TCP/IP for OS/2

A network card installed in the printer with appropriate cabling connected to your network.

Warp Server V 4.0

Lan Server V 4.0 and TCP/IP for OS/2 V 2.0

OS/2 Warp V 4.0

OS/2 Warp Connect V 3.0

O S / 2 4

Compatibility

The C55 Docu7Print Color Laser Printer with an installed network interface card has been tested in the following environments:

Network Operating Systems

Warp Server V 4.0 (with TCP/IP installed)

Lan Server V 4.0 with TCP/IP for OS/2 V 2.1

OS/2 Warp V 4.0 (Peer to Peer) (with TCP/IP installed)

OS/2 Warp Connect V 3.0 (Peer to Peer) (with TCP/IP installed)

Required OS/2 FIXPACKS

Warp Server:

APAR 11017 - or -

MPTS Fixpack WR08415 (converged) and “LATEST” TCP/IP

V 4.0 PRINT Fixpack (including any requisite fixes/apars) - or -

TCP/IP Fixpack UN00959 and “LATEST” TCP/IP V 3.1

PRINT Fixpack (including any requisite fixes/apars)

Lan Server V 4.0 with TCP/IP V 2.0

APAR 11017 (PN 70015)

OS/Warp V 4.0

MPTS Fixpack WR08415 (converged) and “LATEST”

TCP/IP V 4.0 PRINT Fixpack (including any requisite fixes/apars)

OS/2 Warp Connect V 3.0

MPTS Fixpack WR08415 (converged) and “LATEST”

TCP/IP V 4.0 PRINT Fixpack (including any requisite fixes/apars) –or-

TCP/IP Fixpack UN00067 and “LATEST” TCP/IP V3.0

PRINT Fixpack (including any requisite fixes/apars)

OTHER VERSIONS Other versions of Lan Server with TCP/IP for

OS/2 may work, but have not been tested and are not supported.

O S / 2 5

Quick Step (OS/2 Warp Server v 4.0)

To install and use your XEROX DocuPrint Color Printer in an IBM

Warp Server environment, you will need to perform several administrative tasks in order to install the printer and configure your server.

Quick Install Setup

1.

INSTALL NIC (Network Interface Card) – Token Ring must set

16/4Mbs.

2.

NETWORK CABLE CONNECTION - Attach

RJ45/DB15/BNC.

3.

PRINT SETTINGS PAGE - Print the Print Settings page from the Control Panel.

4.

TCP/IP & CABLE SETTINGS - TCP/IP enabled/Cable

Auto Select/RJ-45,etc.

5.

CREATE OS/2 PRINTER OBJECT - Install/create printer driver& printer and share.

6.

TEST PRINT - Start LPRPORTD/LPRMON, ping printer, open

EPM and test print.

7.

COLOR/PRINT QUALITY - Refer to the DocuPrint

C55/C55mp User Guide.

Troubleshooting

1.

Reinstall NIC. Make sure lights are active.

2.

Check cables/drops. Are they active?

3.

Print Settings. Check Enabled=ON,

IPADDRESS=dhcp/bootp/static (make sure the IP Address resolution is set properly. Use DHCP if your network uses a

DHCP server to assign IP addresses. Use RARP/BOOTP if your network uses BOOTP to assign IP addresses, and use STATIC if you wish to enter the IP address via the Control Panel).

4.

Recheck RJ-45/BD-15/BNC. Recheck 16 or 4 Mbps.

O S / 2 6

5.

Printer Properties - Using LPD Output Port. WIN-OS2 using

LPRMON.

6.

Watch LPRPORTD Screen - Is there Activity? In printer input light processing?

7.

It may take a few prints before initial quality responds. Print 10-

20 pages first.

8.

Refer to the DocuPrint C55/C55mp User Guide for additional information.

O S / 2 7

Step-by-Step Setup for IBM TCP/IP for OS/2

TCP/IP Protocol Configuration

1.

Acquire two IP addresses for use on your server and your

XEROX DocuPrint printer.

2.

Install TCP/IP for OS/2. Remember to open Lan Adapter and

Protocol Support (LAPS/MPTS, etc) and configure the TCP/IP protocol for your network adapter. (See your OS/2 documentation for configuring network adapters for the TCP/IP protocol.)

3. Open (double-click) TCP/IP Configuration Object.

Click Printing TAB and enter the following:

REMOTE PRINT SERVER = Printer IP Address in 32-bit dotted decimal notation (e.g. 127.0.0.0).

REMOTE PRINT SERVER’S PRINTER = ps (Enter

“ps”, without quotes and in lowercase.)

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LPD PORTS = Enter a number between 2 and 64 inclusive.

FOR OS/2 PRINTING ONLY (NO WIN-OS/2) Click the

Autostart TAB. Highlight lprportd, then click Autostart

Service, Foreground Session, and Minimized.

Close the TCP/IP Configuration windows. Click SAVE, then reply YES to Update CONFIG.SYS.

Shutdown your server/workstation and reboot.

NOTE: Once completed and you have rebooted, use the “ping “ command at an OS/2 Command Prompt to ping your server/workstation’s IP address. Repeat the ping command using your

DocuPrint printer’s IP Address to confirm that your printer is configured properly for using TCP/IP.

O S / 2 8

OS/2 Software Installation

Installing the DocuPrint OS/2 Print Driver

1.

From your OS/2 desktop, use your mouse to double-click on

Templates.

2.

Scroll, if necessary, until you see the Printer Template.

3.

Place the cursor over the Printer Template. Press and hold mouse button 2 to drag the Printer icon onto the desktop.

4.

When the Create a Printer screen appears, enter the desired printer name in the text box at the upper left corner of the screen.

5.

Click on Install new printer driver.

6.

In the box at the top left labeled Printer Driver Selection, click the radio button for Other OS/2 Printer Driver.

7.

Click Install.

8.

Insert the OS/2 printer driver diskette supplied with your

DocuPrint printer.

9.

In the Directory text box, enter the path in which the drivers reside. Click Refresh. The system will take a minute or two to read the driver files from the diskette.

10.

Scroll the list and use your mouse to select the appropriate

XEROX DocuPrint printer.

11.

Click on Install.

12.

When the Create a Printer screen appears, press Create. In a moment, the window will close and there will be an icon, representing the printer you just created, on your desktop.

13.

Configure the printer for network use, according to your specific network connections.

O S / 2 9

OS/2 Troubleshooting

Introduction

This section contains OS/2 quick check and step-by-step troubleshooting procedures.

Requirements

A workstation/server with the appropriate DocuPrint print driver installed.

A working knowledge of the operating system being used on your workstation.

A Network Interface Card (Ethernet or Token Ring) installed in your printer and proper cabling in use to connect it to the network.

O S / 2 10

OS/2 Quick Check

1.

Check ALL IP addresses and verify that you have set the

DocuPrint printer’s address correctly at the Control Panel.

2.

Use the “ping” command to see if your server responds. If the server does not respond you may have an addressing or network problem.

3.

Use the “ping” command to see if your DocuPrint printer responds. If the printer does not respond, you may have an addressing or network problem. Correct these conditions and retry.

4.

Use the “ping” command to see if your gateway responds. If the gateway does not respond, you may have an addressing or network problem. Correct these conditions and retry.

5.

Check your router, subnet (if applicable), and gateway addresses.

(Incorrect addressing can render your lpr/lpd printing system unusable.)

6.

For OS/2 printing only, is LPRPORTD.EXE running?

7.

For OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 printing, is LPRMON.EXE running?

8.

Have you applied appropriate Fixpacks, APAR’s (see compatibility for required Fixpacks). If not, the proper Fixpack must be applied.

TCP/IP for OS/2 Versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0

1.

Make sure the OS/2 SPOOLER Print Priority is at the Maximum value of 189. (Lowering this value frees up memory resources but can have adverse affects on printing graphics. Try adjusting the value to “tune” your server/workstation performance.)

2.

Changes to TCP/IP Configuration may require system reboot rather than the OS/2 Command “TCPSTART.”

O S / 2 11

OS/2 Troubleshooting Step-by-Step

OS/2 Warp V4.0. OS/2 Warp V3.0 (all versions)

Warp Server, Lan Server 4.0, & Warp Connect using TCP/IP for OS/2 Versions 2.0, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0

1.

At the OS/2 Command Prompt, issue the command:

ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx,

where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is your server IP address (i.e.

109.108.145.22). If you receive a correct ping reply, go to step 2; otherwise check your TCP/IP configuration and your

LAPS/MPTS/APS configurations. (See IBM Documentation for configuring TCP/IP for OS/2 and TCP/IP LAPS/MPTS/APS configuration.)

2.

At the OS/2 Command Prompt, issue the command:

ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is your DocuPrint Printer IP address

(e.g.109.108.145.22). If you receive a correct ping reply, go to step 3; otherwise, check to see that the DocuPrint Printer IP address has been correctly entered on the printer. Print a

DocuPrint Print Settings page and confirm that the IP address is entered correctly. If necessary, reenter your IP addresses (IP address, Gateway Address, Subnet Address).

3.

At the OS/2 Command Prompt, issue the command:

ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is your gateway/router IP address (i.e.

100.101.22.5). If you receive a correct ping reply, go to step 4; otherwise, check to see that TCP/IP for OS/2 configuration is correct. (See IBM Documentation for configuring TCP/IP for

OS/2 and TCP/IP LAPS/MPTS/APS configuration.)

O S / 2 12

4.

From the OS/2 Desktop, go to OS/2 System, System Setup,

Spooler, open Spooler Settings, and confirm that the SPOOLER

Print Priority is set to maximum of 189. If currently set to 189, go to step 5.

5.

Insert your DocuPrint OS/2 Printer Driver diskette into drive a:

6.

At the OS/2 Command Prompt, issue this exact command:

lpr -p ps -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx a:\sample.ps*

(where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxx is the IP address of your DocuPrint

Color Laser Printer). If the test page test.ps prints, you have an

OS/2 configuration problem. Make sure that you have

LPRPORTD or LPRMON running. (If not, activate by issuing the OS/2 command: LPRPORTD or LPMON.) (For LPRMON, see IBM Documentation for correct parameters.)

7.

If your DocuPrint Color Laser Printer does not print the test page, check with your TCP/IP, domain, system administrator to confirm the correctness of all TCP/IP settings and configurations. If you are unable to print, call your XEROX representative.

NOTE: Create a test file with the name sample.ps by opening any word processor/text editor. Create a document, then print the document using the Print to File option in the PostScript Job

Properties window of the DocuPrint C55mp printer. Save the file with the name sample.ps.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 1

Chapter 8

CentreWare DP Software

Instructions

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 2

Chapter Eight Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 4

Purpose................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ 4

Objective................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 4

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ....................... 5

Key Features and Benefits of CentreWare DP ................................ ................................ ...... 6

Organization Of This Chapter ................................ ................................ ............................... 7

Printer Install With Setup Wizard ................................................................................. 8

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 8

Setup Wizard for NDS Networks ................................ ................................ ........................... 9

Setup Wizard for Bindery Networks ................................ ................................ .................... 10

CentreWare DP Features............................................................................................. 11

Main Screen Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 11

Main Screen Features ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 12

Title Bar ................................ ................................ ................................ ......................... 12

Menu Bar ................................ ................................ ................................ ....................... 12

Tool Bar ................................ ................................ ................................ ......................... 13

Printers List................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 14

Status Bar ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 14

Printer Status Info ................................ ................................ ................................ .......... 14

Location Field................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 15

Printer Graphic................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 15

Refresh Button ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 15

More Button ................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 16

Printer Menu ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 17

Setup Wizard ................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 17

Advanced Setup................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 17

Properties ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 18

View Menu ................................ ................................ ................................ ......................... 29

Tool Bar Enabling/Disabling ................................ ................................ ........................... 29

Status Bar Enabling/Disabling ................................ ................................ ........................ 29

Filter ................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 29

Diagnostics Menu................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 30

Printer Maintenance ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 30

Reset Printer!................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 31

Tools Menu ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 32

Client Setup ................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 32

TCP/IP Discovery................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 33

Upgrade Printer................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 35

Fonts................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 36

Send File ................................ ................................ ................................ ....................... 37

Demo Pages ................................ ................................ ................................ .................. 37

Help Menu................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 38

CentreWare DP................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 38

About CentreWare DP................................ ................................ ................................ .... 38

CentreWare Driver Installer (CDI).............................................................................. 39

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 3

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 39

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 39

How To Plan Your Driver Distribution Strategy................................ ................................ .... 40

Create/Edit The Login Script................................ ................................ ........................... 41

CentreWare Driver Installer Operation ................................ ................................ ................ 42

Opening An Existing Configuration File................................ ................................ ........... 42

Selecting Drivers To Be Installed Or Upgraded................................ ............................... 43

Selecting Drivers To Be Uninstalled................................ ................................ ................ 44

Saving The Changes To A Configuration File ................................ ................................ . 44

Modifying The Configuration List ................................ ................................ .................... 45

To Change A Printer Driver Configuration................................ ................................ ....... 45

To Prepare the Client Workstation for Driver Download ................................ .................. 46

Verify The Driver Download................................ ................................ ............................ 46

CentreWare Driver Installer Troubleshooting ................................ ................................ .. 47

Creating a Filter.......................................................................................................... 48

Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ ............................ 48

Procedure ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 48

Advanced Setup.......................................................................................................... 49

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 49

Advanced Setup in Bindery Mode ................................ ................................ ....................... 50

To Start Advanced Setup ................................ ................................ ............................... 50

To Change the Primary Server your Printer Will Service ................................ ................. 50

To Create a Print Server................................ ................................ ................................ . 50

To Add/Remove A User Or Operator ................................ ................................ .............. 51

To Notify A User................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 51

To Create A New Queue ................................ ................................ ................................ 51

To Attach A Queue To A Print Server ................................ ................................ ............. 52

To Delete A Queue ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 52

To Detach A Queue From A Print Server ................................ ................................ ........ 52

To Send A Test Print To A Printer ................................ ................................ .................. 52

To Manage An Existing Queue ................................ ................................ ....................... 52

Advanced Setup for NDS Networks ................................ ................................ .................... 54

To Start Advanced Setup ................................ ................................ ............................... 54

To Change The NDS Tree................................ ................................ .............................. 54

To Change The Print Server Context ................................ ................................ .............. 54

To Create A Print Server ................................ ................................ ................................ 54

To Add/Remove A User, Operator Or Printer ................................ ................................ .. 55

To Add/Remove Users Or Operators To/From A Queue ................................ ................. 56

To Detach A Queue ................................ ................................ ................................ ....... 56

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 4

Introduction

Xerox CentreWare DP is a fast, easy-to-use tool which allows you to configure and check the status of network connected printers.

CentreWare DP can be used to quickly set up a printer on your Novell network as well as verify the operation of the printer once it has been installed.

When CentreWare DP is used, maintenance checks can be performed at any time. This minimizes down time by enabling you to check consumables status any time you wish and then schedule replacement during off-peak usage.

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to give detailed instructions on CentreWare

DP.

Objective

To familiarize you with the features and tools available with the

CentreWare DP software.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 5

Requirements

A basic knowledge of the terminology of the printer.

A network interface card installed and connected to an active network with the appropriate cable.

CentreWare DP must be loaded on a workstation connected to an active

NetWare network, with the following workstation requirements:

Windows 3.X

6 Megabytes of RAM (8 recommended).

10 Megabytes of hard disk space available.

Netware VLMs loaded.

Windows 95

8 Megabytes of RAM.

10 Megabytes of hard disk space available.

Novell NetWare Client 32 loaded.

Windows NT

12 Megabytes of RAM.

10 Megabytes of hard disk space available.

Novell NetWare Client 32 loaded.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 6

Key Features and Benefits of CentreWare DP

Feature

Setup Wizard

Advanced Setup

Instant Status

CentreWare Driver

Installer

Remote

Configuration and

Management

Diagnostics

Printer Upgrades

Benefit

Step-by-step guide to get your printer up on the network quickly.

Want to service multiple fileservers and queues? This will become your tool of choice.

While CentreWare DP is running, select a printer from the Printers List to see what that printer is doing right now!

Install or upgrade print drivers to workstations on your network automatically.

Don’t go to your printer! Most configuration and monitoring tasks can be done from your workstation.

Troubleshoot from your desk.

If your printer is equipped with Flash ROM, you can upgrade right from CentreWare DP.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 7

Organization Of This Chapter

The information provided in this TIG chapter is organized with the Setup

Wizard section first to allow rapid connection and use of your printer.

The remainder of the chapter is broken down feature by feature as organized in the CentreWare DP menus.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 8

Printer Install With Setup Wizard

Introduction

Quick Setup under CentreWare DP consists of a few short steps to get your printer connected to a fileserver and attached to a queue quickly and without having to use the NetWare PCONSOLE or NETADMIN utilities.

To connect your printer to multiple fileservers or service multiple queues use Advanced Setup.

This procedure varies based on the NetWare type you have installed.

NetWare 4.1X Users should use Setup Wizard for NDS Networks.

NetWare 3.1X Users should use Setup Wizard for Bindery

Networks.

NOTE: You must login to a NetWare fileserver or NDS tree with

SUPERVISOR or ADMIN privileges in order to complete this procedure.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 9

Setup Wizard for NDS Networks

1.

Click your mouse once on the Setup Wizard button, or open the

Printer menu and select Setup Wizard.

2.

When the Setup Wizard Welcome screen appears, click Next >.

3.

The Select NetWare Server dialog box appears.

4.

Click once on the Install this device on an NDS Tree.

5.

Select the desired NDS Tree.

6.

If prompted, enter a user name and password for the desired Tree and click Login.

7.

Once you have selected your NDS Tree, click Next>.

8.

The Select Context dialog screen will appear and the default context for the selected Tree will be displayed. To configure your printer for this context, click Next >. To select a different context, click Change

Context, select a new context from the list, click OK. Click Next >.

9.

The Name the Device dialog box will appear. Enter a new name for the printer you have selected, or keep the default name. Click Next >.

10.

The Select Queue dialog box appears.

To create a new queue, click the Create Queue button and enter a new queue name. Click Create Queue again. Click Next>.

To select an existing queue, click the Select Queue button and chose a queue. Click OK. Click Next >.

11.

The Confirm Choices dialog box will appear displaying the Printer

Name and the Name of the Queue you have supplied. Click Finish.

12.

A pop-up box will appear indicating the Wizard is configuring devices.

13.

After a few moments, the Congratulations dialog screen will appear.

Click the Close button. A box will pop up asking you if you would like a test page sent to the queue. Click Yes.

14.

Review this page and VERIFY that your Tree, Context, and Queue name agree with those you chose in Setup Wizard.

15.

Run a test print from a software application to verify printer operation.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 10

Setup Wizard for Bindery Networks

1.

Click your mouse once on the Setup Wizard button, or open the

Printer menu and select Setup Wizard.

2.

When the Setup Wizard Welcome screen appears, click Next >.

3.

The Select NetWare Server dialog box appears.

4.

Click once on the Install this device on a Bindery Server.

5.

Select a server from the drop-down list and click Next >.

6.

If prompted, enter a user name and password for the desired server and click Login.

7.

The Name the Device dialog box will appear. You may enter a new name for the printer you have selected or keep the default name. Click

Next >.

8.

The Select Queue dialog box appears. You may select an existing queue or create a new queue. To create a new queue, click the Create

Queue button and enter a new queue name in the text box. Click

Create Queue again. After selecting or creating a queue, click Next >.

9.

The Confirm Choices dialog box will appear and display the new

Printer Name and name of New Queue information that you have supplied. Click Finish.

10.

The wizard configuration pop-up box will appear stating that Setup is configuring your devices.

11.

After a few moments, the Congratulations dialog screen will appear.

Click Close. A pop-up box will ask if you would like to send a test page to the queue. Click Yes.

12.

Review this page to VERIFY that your File Server, Print Server, and

Print Queue name agree with those you chose in Setup Wizard.

13.

Run a test print from a software application to verify printer operation.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 11

CentreWare DP Features

Main Screen Overview

The Main Screen of the CentreWare DP application is laid out in logical blocks. See the next page for details on these features.

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Printers List

Status Bar

Printer Status Information

Location Information

Printer Graphic

Printer

Graphic

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 12

Main Screen Features

Title Bar

This bar located at the very top of the Main Screen contains the name of the software application.

Menu Bar

This bar, located across the top of the Main Screen just under the Title Bar, contains the various drop-down menus used in CentreWare DP. Details on the contents of these menus are contained later in this chapter. The Menu names and their contents are as follows:

Printer

Setup Wizard

Advanced Setup

Properties

Exit

View

Toolbar

Status Bar

Filter

Diagnostics

Printer Maintenance

Reset Printer!

Tools

Help

Client Setup

Upgrade Printer

Fonts

Send File

Demo Pages

CentreWare DP

About CentreWare DP

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 13

Tool Bar

Enabled or disabled from the View menu, the Tool Bar provides shortcuts to frequently-used printer functions. These give one-click access to the things you do the most. The buttons are as follows:

Setup Wizard

This button opens the Setup Wizard which steps you quickly through the setup of your printer on the network

System Properties

This button opens the System Properties window pertaining to your printer. The TABS it contains provide information about the configuration of your printer.

Connection Properties

This button opens the Connection Properties window pertaining to your printer. The TABS it contains provide information about the local port(s) and network configuration of your printer.

Printer Maintenance

This button opens the Printer Maintenance window pertaining to your printer. The TABS it contains provide information about the consumables usage and support information of your printer.

Help

This button starts the CentreWare DP On-Line Electronic Help system.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 14

Printers List

The Printers window displays a list of all printers which are supported by

CentreWare DP. Click once on any printer in this window to select it for configuration or monitoring.

On large networks with many printers you may want to generate a Filter to make selecting a printer easier. To get detailed instructions, see the section in this chapter entitled Creating a Filter.

Status Bar

This bar at the bottom of the CentreWare DP screen supplies information at your workstation regarding your printer. You can enable or disable the

Status Bar from the View pull down menu.

Additionally, as you move the cursor over different areas of the Main

Screen, the Status Bar contains Hints about the functions of those areas.

In the far right hand area, the Status Bar displays the status of your workstation’s NUM LOCK, SCROLL LOCK, and CAPS LOCK keys.

Printer Status Info

Located on the right side of the Main Screen, the status provided varies with the printer selected.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 15

Location Field

Located just under the Printer Status information field, this field contains a brief message about the physical location of the printer. This is especially important on large office installations. You may change this information from the General Tab of the System Properties menu.

Printer Graphic

This area just to the right of the Printers List displays a visual representation of the printer selected in the Printers List. The graphic will change depending on the status of the printer.

Refresh Button

This button located just below the Printer Graphic causes CentreWare DP to poll the network for printers and update the Printers List.

On large networks with many printers you may want to generate a Filter to make selecting a printer easier. To get detailed instructions, see the section in this chapter entitled Creating a Filter.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 16

More Button

This button displays a dialog screen containing the Details TAB with its summary of the configuration information of the selected printer. This

TAB contains the following information:

DETAILS TAB

Tray(s)

Number of trays and the current paper size.

Network

Card

Total

Memory

Type of network card installed.

Amount of memory installed.

Software

Version

Current revision of printer firmware.

Hard Drive

Status of Collation Disk (if installed).

Media

Server

Status of Media Server (installed/uninstalled).

Page Count

Current total pages printed.

ALERTS TAB

Also on the More dialog screen is the Alerts TAB, which displays any information on the selected printer which require immediate attention.

The Alerts TAB is an excellent troubleshooting tool if your printer is located in another area. This Tab will display information normally seen on the Display Panel.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 17

Printer Menu

Setup Wizard

The Setup Wizard guides you step-by-step through the installation of a new printer or the reconfiguration of an existing printer. It is recommended that you use Setup Wizard to initially configure your printer. For details see the section entitled Printer Install with Setup Wizard.

Advanced Setup

The Advanced Setup option in the printer menu allows the expert user some additional flexibility and choices for configuring a printer in a networked environment. It is recommended you use Setup Wizard for first time installations and then Advanced Setup to have your printer service multiple queues or fileservers.

NOTE: When you run Advanced Setup you replace the old configuration data with the new settings.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 18

Properties

The Properties entry has multiple fold-out submenus named System and

Connections, which display current values for the chosen printer and allow information to be modified or updated. These profile windows vary by the individual printer selected. The basic profiles are described below.

SYSTEM PROPERTIES

This dialog screen contains the following TABS (based on the printer’s support for each).

GENERAL TAB

This TAB provides the following information and settings:

Location

Print Startup Page

This field may be filled in to allow you to enter a description of the physical location of the printer. This can help users to locate the printer on large networks.

Check this radio button to print a Startup page when the printer is Powered Up.

PAPER TAB

This TAB provides the following information and settings:

Default Paper Source

This drop-list allows you to select the default source of paper for the printer (a multi-tray setup or a Manual Feed option is required).

Transparency Source

This drop-list allows you to select the source of your transparency media. (a multi-tray, or

Manual Feed option, is required).

Custom Paper Size

This drop-list allows the selection (from supported sizes) of the Custom Paper Size for the selected printer.

Auto Tray Switching

Check this box to enable the selected printer to print from the second tray if the first tray becomes empty during a print job.

NOTE: A multi-tray configuration is required and both trays must contain the same paper size.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 19

SUPPORT TAB

This screen allows the user to enter important service and supplies phone numbers for quick reference as shown below:

Serial Number

Xerox Service

Number

The printer’s serial number.

Enter or change the Xerox Service Phone

Number.

Dealer Service

Number

Xerox Supplies

Number

Dealer Supplies

Number

Enter or change the Dealer Service Phone

Number.

Enter or change the Xerox Supplies Phone

Number.

Enter or change the Dealer Supplies Phone

Number.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 20

PCL DEFAULTS TAB

The PCL Defaults TAB contains the following settings:

Number

This is a font substitution number which will enable the use of a different font when the desired font is not available.

This drop-list displays a list of font sets available.

Symbol Set

Font Size

Portrait/

Landscape

This allows the user to adjust the default font size if one is not specified in the data stream of the print job.

User may select the portrait or landscape radio button. These buttons set the orientation of the print job.

Line Wrap

Check this button to set the printer to automatically wrap lines that extend outside the default margins for the printer or are outside the printable area of the selected media.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 21

TIMING TAB

The TIMING TAB allows the user to set these Timeout values:

Wait

Timeout

Hold

Timeout

Time that the printer will wait when a break in communication has occurred. Selections include 20 seconds, 40 seconds, 60 seconds, 5 minutes, or

Never. The default is 60 seconds.

Time in seconds for the printer to hold an incomplete print job before purging that job.

Selections include 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 2,3,4, and 5 minutes. The default is 60 seconds.

Power

Saver

Timeout

Feed

Timeout

Time that the printer will wait after printing the last image before going into Power Saver Mode.

Selections include 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 120 minutes, 300 minutes, or Never. The default is 30 minutes.

Time that the printer will wait for the user to load the Manual Bypass when the current job requires it.

This timeout does not apply if the Manual Bypass door is open. Selections include 60 seconds, 2, 5,

10 and 30 minutes, or Never. Factory default is 2 minutes.

ACCESS TAB

The Access TAB allows the setting (or changing) of a password that will be required of a user prior to making configuration changes to the printer selected in the Printers List.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 22

CONNECTIONS PROPERTIES

TCP/IP TAB

IP

Addressing

This pull down menu allows you to choose Dynamic,

DHLP, or Static addressing. If you wish to manually assign a TCP/IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default

Gateway, chose Static addressing. Type the IP address number into the box provided.

IP Address

Default

Gateway

Enter desired IP Address for the selected printer.

Subnet Mask

Enter desired Subnet Mask to restrict access to selected printer.

Enter desired Default Gateway.

Use these check boxes to Enable or Disable TCP/IP options.

Enable

Banner Page

Check this box to enable LPR Banner page printing.

Enable LPR

Check this box to enable LPR printing to the printer.

Enable

App Socket

Check this box to enable App Socket protocol.

EnableTelnet

Check this box to enable access to status information to

Telnet sessions from remote stations.

Enable TFTP

Check this box to enable the printer to display Telnet menu at remote stations.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 23

PARALLEL TAB

This screen enables the use of check boxes to select or change parallel port options as follows:

NOTE: Type and number of local ports may vary based on the printer selected.

Enable Port

Check this box to enable the parallel port of the printer.

Mode

This drop-list allows the user to set the mode in which the parallel port accepts print jobs. The following modes are available:

AutoSelect – Allows the printer to select the mode in which print jobs are accepted.

PostScript - The printer accepts PostScript without binary. Use of this mode requires all binary information to be encoded in ASCII.

PostScript TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications

Protocol) Mode - This mode uses special control characters to enter and exit the binary mode, within a

PostScript job. This mode is the factory default.

PostScript Binary - This mode allows the sending of binary data within a PostScript job.

Bi-Directional

Enables two-way communication with your printer through the parallel port. Factory default: P1284 nibble mode, IEEE standard. Allows the printer to send and receive data/status.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 24

SERIAL TAB

This screen enables the use of check boxes to select or change serial port options as follows:

Enable

Port

Mode

Printer is ready to print directly from the printer’s serial port using a PC or UNIX workstation.

There are three modes which you can choose manually for the serial port, or choose Auto Select:

PostScript - The printer accepts PostScript without binary data. Use of this mode requires all binary information to be encoded in ASCII.

PostScript TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol)

Mode - This mode uses special control characters to enter and exit the binary mode, within a PostScript job. This mode is the factory default.

PostScript Binary - This mode allows the sending of binary data within a PostScript job.

Baud

Rate

This selection must match the baud rate set at your workstation’s serial port. The factory default is 9600.

Parity

This selection, when enabled, allows for error checking of the data that is being transferred. The factory default is None, which means disabled.

Stop Bits

This selection defines the number of bits used for the end of a character cell. The factory default is 1.

Data

Bits

Flow

Control

This selection defines the number of bits used to construct a character. The factory default is 8.

This selection provides a means to start and stop data flow.

The following two selections are available:

DTR: A control line in the serial cable is used to start and stop data flow.

XON/XOFF: A control character is imbedded in the data stream to start and stop data flow. This is the factory default.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 25

NETWORK CARD TAB

This screen provides information about the network card in the selected printer (if so equipped).

Network

Card Type

S/W

Version

Ethernet or Token Ring.

This entry provides the software revision and date of release.

Connector

Type

Indicates the current connector from which the selected printer will accept print jobs sent across the network.

Token Ring Cards Only

Ring Speed

Select either:

4 Megabits/sec Ring speed.

Source

Routing

16 Megabits/sec Ring speed.

Enabled: sets network card to utilize source routing.

Disabled: sets network card NOT to utilize source routing.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 26

APPLETALK TAB

This TAB enables or disables the AppleTalk protocol on the selected printer and sets the operating parameters of AppleTalk.

Name Area

AppleTalk Name

This field is entered by the user to indicate the name by which the selected printer will be identified on the AppleTalk network.

LocalTalk Area

Enable Port

Check this radio button to enable the

LocalTalk port on the selected printer.

EtherTalk or TokenTalk Area

Enable Port

Check this radio button to enable the

EtherTalk protocol on the selected printer.

Zone

Phase

This field will have the AppleTalk zone name in which the selected printer resides.

These radio buttons select AppleTalk

Phase 1 or 2 depending on the network to which the selected printer is connected.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 27

NETBEUI TAB

This tab allows the user to enable the NetBEUI protocol and supplies information regarding the NetBEUI configuration of the selected printer.

Enabled

NETBEUI

Group

Check this radio button to enable NetBEUI protocol reception.

Workgroup name in which the printer will reside.

Machine

Name

Password

Service

Remarks

Printer name used for a NetBEUI network.

Password to limit access by users.

Name of the Print Service located in the Machine Name.

Comment about printer (location, responsible person etc.).

SNMP TAB

This tab contains information which can be utilized in the SNMP protocol to relate information about the following items to the remote users.

Person responsible for the selected printer.

System

Contact

System

Name

Common SNMP Management Station Name.

System

Location

Where the printer is physically located.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 28

NETWARE TAB

This tab contains the following information:

Print Server

Name

Contains the assigned name for your printer.

Primary

Server

NDS Tree

Queue Scan

Rate

Contains the name of the current server to which your printer is attached.

Contains the name of the NetWare Directory Services tree in which your printer resides.

NDS

Context

This field will contain the current NDS Context in which your printer resides.

Frame Type

You may view or change the current frame type your printer uses for logging into a NetWare fileserver.

Enable

Notification

Selecting this check box enables the notification feature, which sends a message to the user upon completion of a print job.

View or change the time interval (in seconds) your printer waits between checks for print jobs in the assigned queue(s).

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 29

View Menu

Tool Bar Enabling/Disabling

The Tool Bar entry in this menu enables/disables the tool bar just under the

Menu bar. The entry will be checked when the tool bar is visible.

Status Bar Enabling/Disabling

The Status Bar entry in this menu enables/disables the status bar at the bottom of the CentreWare DP window. The entry will be checked when the status bar is visible.

Filter

The Filters entry in this menu enables the user to “filter” out unwanted printers from the Printers Window. A workstation on a large network may see hundreds of printers of all descriptions. The filters feature of

CentreWare DP makes specific selection of a printer much simpler. For details on how to set up a filter, see the section in this chapter entitled

Creating a Filter.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 30

Diagnostics Menu

Printer Maintenance

After selecting a printer from the Printers List, this Printer Maintenance submenu opens a new dialog screen which displays current values and status for the consumables in the selected printer. There are three TABs on the Printer Maintenance dialog screen. While in this dialog screen the graphic on the right side of the dialog box will change with the positioning of your cursor over a Consumable Item. The graphic indicates the area of the printer which contains the selected Consumable. The following

Consumables can be monitored:

Dry Ink/Developer TAB

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black Toner usage.

Color and Black Developer Percentage Remaining.

OTHER TAB

Print Drum Percent Usage

Fuser Percent Usage

Fuser Oil Status

Waste Box Status

SUPPORT TAB

This TAB contains the following Service and Supplies phone numbers:

Serial Number

Dealer Service Number

Dealer Supplies Number

Xerox Service Number

Xerox Supplies Number

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 31

Reset Printer!

After selecting a printer from the Printers List, the Reset Printer submenu will cause the printer to purge any pending print jobs and force the printer to go through the power up sequence. Use of this function should be limited to administrators who have first alerted users that impending print jobs will be lost.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 32

Tools Menu

Client Setup

Client Setup enables the display or change of port information of the printer as well as Refresh Time settings.

Serial

COM Port: Use the drop-list menu to select the serial

port to which your printer is attached.

Parallel

Printer Type: Once a port has been selected, you may

choose a model of printer from this list.

LPT Port: Use the drop-list menu to select the

parallel port to which your printer is attached.

Printer Type: Once a port has been selected, you may

choose a model of printer from this list.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 33

TCP/IP Discovery

OVERVIEW

In addition to being a quick way to setup and monitor your printer on a

NetWare network, CentreWare DP has the ability to monitor printers on a network utilizing the TCP/IP protocol.

This feature is especially important on mixed networks or Intranets where

TCP/IP may be used in conjunction with other protocols.

STARTUP PROCEDURE

1.

Start CentreWare DP on a workstation.

2.

Select the TCP/IP radio button located below the Printers List.

3.

CentreWare DP will scan the local subnet of your network for printers with a TCP/IP address.

4.

When the scan has completed, any CentreWare DP supported printer on your subnet will be displayed in the Printers List.

5.

To test, select a printer and CentreWare DP will communicate with that printer and update the status window graphic to indicate the printer being monitored.

6.

Select the Diagnostics menu. From this menu select the Printer

Maintenance entry.

7.

A new dialog screen will open containing consumable (Toner,

Developer) information for the selected printer.

8.

Any supported printer on your subnet can be accessed using this procedure. To expand printer discovery to other subnets or to limit it to specific printers, see the section entitled Configuration Procedure.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 34

CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE

WARNING: If your network is connected directly to the Internet or a WAN, use caution when setting the Subnet Mask parameter.

1.

Start CentreWare DP on a workstation.

2.

Select the TCP/IP radio button located below the Printers List.

3.

CentreWare DP will scan the local subnet of your network for printers with a TCP/IP address.

4.

When the scan has completed, any CentreWare DP supported printer on your subnet will be displayed in the Printers List.

5.

Select the Tools menu. From this menu select the TCP/IP Discovery entry.

6.

TCP/IP discovery outside your subnet can be enabled by when you set these parameters:

Subnet Mask TAB - A fixed value that sets a range of TCP/IP addresses to search.

Subnet Addresses TAB- Sets a range of subnets to search. A

Subnet address may be any address within the subnet. To remove a

Subnet Address, highlight the address in the list window and click the <<Move button.

7.

Information on one or more specific printers may be dissevered by use of this parameter:

IP Addresses TAB- Sets a list of specific TCP/IP addresses to search. To remove an IP Address, highlight the address in the list window and click the <<Move button.

8.

Plan your search strategy based on the relative locations of your printers and make the appropriate changes.

9.

It may be necessary to change these parameters as printers are added or moved on the network.

10.

Once these parameters are set, you can choose a device from the

Printers List and monitor or verify its hardware configuration.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 35

Upgrade Printer

Many of the printers that CentreWare DP supports are equipped with Flash

ROM on the Main Controller card and/or the Network Interface Card.

Flash ROM enables you to upgrade the “firmware” of your printer without having to physically remove and replace the ROMs.

You should consult your printer documentation to determine if your printer is equipped with Flash ROM and on which card. Also, some printer models supported by CentreWare DP may require the upgrade printer function only be performed while connected to the serial or parallel port of the printer.

PROCEDURE

This procedure requires special upgrade file(s) for each type of printer.

You may obtain these files either from the Xerox Web Site

(www.xerox.com), or on a floppy disk (for NIC Card upgrades). Obtain the upgrade file for your printer, copy it to a workstation hard drive, and record the path (drive and directory) to which it was copied.

NOTE: In Step 3 below, if the Upgrade Printer entry is disabled (grayedout) the selected printer requires direct connection (serial or parallel port) to be upgraded.

1.

Start CentreWare DP from your workstation.

2.

Select the Tools menu.

3.

Select the Upgrade Printer entry.

4.

The Upgrade Printer process will start and request the path and name of the upgrade file. Be sure to check the Printer radio button in the upgrade field. Enter the path of the upgrade file and click OK.

5.

CentreWare DP will copy the file to the printer. Once the upgrade has been completed, the printer will reset and a page will print showing the new version of firmware and that the upgrade completed successfully.

6.

Repeat this procedure if you are upgrading both the Main Controller and the Network Interface Card firmware, making sure to choose the

Network radio button in the upgrade field.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 36

Fonts

Select the Fonts entry to view or change the method by which your printer receives font information. Fonts may be downloaded to printer memory for temporary storage as True Type or Bitmap objects.

If your printer is equipped with a hard drive, you may download fonts to it for permanent storage. Your printer may have PCL or both PCL and

PostScript installed. Refer to the TABs below based on which fonts you are working with.

NOTE: For Hard Drive equipped printers, Get Available Fonts will also display fonts stored on the Hard Drive.

The PCL Fonts TAB contains these features:

Resident

Fonts

Displays a list of the PCL printer-resident fonts.

Print

Causes the printer to print a list of the PCL printerresident fonts.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 37

The PostScript Fonts TAB contains these features:

Resident

Fonts

Displays a list of the PostScript printer-resident fonts and any PostScript fonts, which have been temporarily stored in the printer’s memory.

RAM Fonts

Displays any RAM fonts that are in the printer’s memory.

Print

Causes the printer to print a list of the PostScript printerresident fonts.

Add/Delete

These buttons allow you to add or delete selected fonts to, or from, the printer.

Send File

When Send File is selected, the user will be prompted for a file name to output to the selected printer. The CentreWare DP application will then download the file to the printer for processing.

Demo Pages

This option allows you to send a new Demo Page to your printer only if a hard drive is installed on the selected printer.

After selecting this option you will be prompted for the name and location of the desired Demo Page file. CentreWare DP will then send this file to your printer.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 38

Help Menu

CentreWare DP

This menu item will launch the CentreWare DP Electronic Help System.

You may also launch this Help system by clicking the Tool Bar’s question mark button with your mouse.

About CentreWare DP

Selecting this entry displays the software version and copyright information for CentreWare DP.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 39

CentreWare Driver Installer (CDI)

Introduction

The Xerox CentreWare Driver Installer (CDI) is a utility for use on a

Novell NetWare based network of workstations running Microsoft

Windows.

The CentreWare Driver Installer (CDI) option of CentreWare DP gives you a tool to automatically control how print drivers are distributed in your

Novell NetWare network environment.

Using Novell NetWare login scripts, CDI enables System Administrators

(sysadmin) to configure printer drivers for installation on PC workstations from a network.

This section will provide information on how CDI is used to automate the process of driver installation, removal, and upgrades.

Requirements

Network server running Novell NetWare 3.11 or later.

One or more networked PC clients, 386 class or above, with at least 8 megabytes of RAM and Windows 3.1, Windows 3.11, and Windows

95.

Printer drivers loaded by selecting CDI in the Custom Install option of the Software Installer.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 40

How To Plan Your Driver Distribution Strategy

The distribution of print drivers over a network must be done with care to avoid such problems as unnecessary administration time and incorrect driver installation.

CDI provides you with a management utility that enables you to create configuration files that control the driver “database” from which each workstation may draw.

It is probably safe to assume that at any one time there may be multiple versions of operating systems on the workstations connected to your network. This makes the strategy planning more critical.

Under NetWare, CDI uses login scripts to help control driver access and distribution. NetWare has three basic types of login scripts:

Script Type

System login script

Group login scripts

User login scripts

Strategy Considerations

Any user logging into the network must process this script. All users may not need the drivers.

May require multiple group management.

Login restrictions may be necessary.

Any of these scripts may be used to enable the CDI driver downloading capability. The strategy you use will vary with your environment.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 41

Create/Edit The Login Script

Edit the system, group, or user login script(s) whose printer drivers are to be installed. Add the lines shown in the example below.

In the following example the sysadmin sets up a login script on a NetWare

4.1X server that looks like this:

EXAMPLE:

MAP R V:=<servername>\<volume:>\<path>

V:

#V:DRVINST.EXE C:\WINDOWS V:

NOTE:

<servername>=Your fileserver name

<volume:>=Logical Volume Name (ie. SYS:, VOL1:)

<path>= directory where you installed the Printer drivers during installation (ie. \cntrware\cw_cdi)

The three lines in the example above remain the same regardless of the type of script in which they are used. V: is only an example, you may substitute another drive letter if you wish.

The utility which is run from the login script is called DRVINST.EXE and takes two parameters upon execution. The first parameter is the fully qualified path (including drive letter) to the user’s WIN.INI file. The second parameter is the directory where the WDRVINST.EXE and

WDRVINST.INF files reside.

NOTE: DRVINST.EXE expects that the WDRVINST.EXE and

WDRVINST.INF files reside in the same directory on the server.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 42

CentreWare Driver Installer Operation

1.

Windows 3.1x, and Windows for Workgroups, from Program Manager, find the Xerox DocuPrint Program group containing the Driver Installer

AdminUtility and double-click the icon. Windows 95 users click the

Start button, select Programs, then in the cascade menu select Xerox

DocuPrint.

2.

The Driver Installer Admin Utility will start.

The Driver Installer Admin Utility will create and edit the configuration file, WDRVINST.INF. The key to running CDI is the

WDRVINST.INF file. This file contains the list of printer drivers to install or remove. During the initial installation of CDI a

WDRVINST.INF file will be created for you.

The procedures on the following pages will help you set up the configuration file for CDI.

Opening An Existing Configuration File

Once a Configuration file has been created, it can be reopened and modified. To open an existing file:

1.

Select the File menu.

2.

Select the Open option.

3.

Verify the path is correct to the drive and directory where the print driver files were copied during installation.

4.

Select the WDRVINST.INF file and click OK.

5.

The file will be opened and the information in it will be displayed in the Configuration list.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 43

Selecting Drivers To Be Installed Or Upgraded

NOTE: Before using the CDI Admin Utility, the location (path) of the printer drivers should be noted. This information will need to be supplied to the utility, and the Browse function will facilitate entering the correct file server path. It will also be necessary to determine where the Configuration

File should be located.

1.

Select the desired printer driver. Highlight the printer to be managed.

This driver will have an Action applied by the CDI utility for all the client workstations.

2.

Select Install or Upgrade as the action to be performed.

3.

Select the Operating System version of the driver you want installed or upgraded.

4.

Enter the path for this driver. The Browse button will allow easy navigation of the file server to locate the driver directory for the selected driver.

5.

Select the Port/Queue connection. Use the pull-down menu to find the desired port connection. Queue assignments must include a fully qualified network path name.

6.

Use the Add To Configuration list button to add this driver to the list.

7.

Repeat the above steps for each desired driver to be installed or upgraded by the Xerox CDI utility.

8.

When you have finished the selection process, click Apply.

NOTE: If an error message appears regarding the path or version of the driver, correct the path and or version and click Apply.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 44

Selecting Drivers To Be Uninstalled

This will allow the previous versions of the drivers to be removed from all of the ports.

1.

Select the desired printer driver. Highlight the printer to be Uninstalled from the client workstations.

2.

Select uninstall as the action to be performed.

3.

The port and path information will not be necessary, so these options will be grayed out.

Saving The Changes To A Configuration File

There are four different ways the CDI Admin Utility can save the changes:

1.

Select the OK button. If no file had been previously selected, the

Browse function will appear to allow the directory and filename to be selected. After the changes are saved, the utility stops executing.

2.

By pulling down on the File menu the Save option can be selected.

This will allow the change to be written to disk, and further changes can be made to the same file. If this file has not been saved before, the

Browse function will appear to allow the directory and filename to be selected.

3.

Select the Save As option from the File menu. This will allow the current information to be written to a new file.

4.

Select the Exit option from the File menu. This will allow changes to be saved prior to closing the utility. If the current file and path are empty, a Browse window will allow the selection of the location to save the changes.

NOTE: It is recommended that the Configuration file be named

‘WDRVINST.INF’ and it should be placed in the same location as the

Xerox CDI utility. This file contains parameters that are used by

WDRVINST.EXE, the application which installs the printer drivers under

Windows.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 45

Modifying The Configuration List

It is sometimes desirable to set the client workstation’s default driver to one of the newly installed drivers.

TO MAKE A CONFIGURED DRIVER THE DEFAULT

1.

Select the configured driver from the list.

2.

Click the Set Default button. This will put an asterisk in front of the driver to reflect this default status.

TO REMOVE THE DEFAULT STATUS

1.

Select the configured driver from the list.

2.

Click the Clear Default button. This will allow each client workstation to maintain its existing default driver and ensure that none of the

Configured drivers replaces the current default driver.

To Change A Printer Driver Configuration

TO CHANGE THE PORT OR PATH FOR A DRIVER IN THE

CONFIGURATION LIST

1.

Select the configured printer driver from the list.

2.

Click the Remove From List button. This will remove the driver from the Configuration List. It will not remove the driver from the file server, and will not affect users who have this driver already installed.

Now the printer driver can be selected from the list of drivers and the correct information can be supplied.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 46

To Prepare the Client Workstation for Driver Download

1.

Verify that the client workstation has sufficient hard drive space remaining to hold the print drivers.

2.

Check the NetWare rights of the user to ensure that the directory to which the installer copied the print drivers can be accessed.

3.

Verify the path to the users WIN.INI file is correct and matches the one entered in the login script

4.

The driver will be updated. Exit Windows and restart the system.

Verify The Driver Download

1.

As Windows restarts, a Xerox CentreWare Driver Installer screen will appear.

2.

Verify that the message at the bottom of the screen says it is installing the correct print driver.

3.

After completion, a final screen will be displayed by CDI after successful installation of all drivers.

4.

Click anywhere in the text area while the final screen is displayed to dismiss the window. The window will automatically dismiss itself after approximately 10 seconds.

5.

If error messages were displayed, refer to the CentreWare Driver

Installer Troubleshooting section on the next page.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 47

CentreWare Driver Installer Troubleshooting

The table below contains some error messages and their corrective actions.

Message

“Searching for installable components...”

Corrective Action

If this message persists for more than a second or two, there may be a problem with the local WIN.INI file, the

[WDrvInst] section in the local

WIN.INI file, or the network connection in the case of server based installation of the drivers.

“Can't find path to wdrvinst.inf in local

WIN.INI...”

“wdrvinst.inf file is either corrupt or not found...”

“Installation was not completed...Please see your

System Administrator.”

Check the WIN.INI file for a

[WDrvInst] section and ensure that the entry for “infdir=” correctly points to the directory in which the

WDRVINST.INF file resides.

Ensure that the local WIN.INI file entry for “infdir=“ is correct and that the WDRVINST.INF file has the tag line “Xerox=The Document

Company” in the first section of the file.

Use Print Manager or Control Panel to check which drivers were successfully installed; then try to install the missing drivers from the same path using the

“add/install printer” dialog in either

Control Panel or Print Manager. If this procedure does not work the first time, reboot Windows and repeat the procedure before running any other applications.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 48

Creating a Filter

Overview

Procedure

Filters enable the user to “filter” which printers are being displayed in the

Printers List. You can generate a filter based on the types of printers available. This procedure demonstrates how to make a custom filter.

1.

From the CentreWare DP main screen uses the mouse and click once on the View menu.

2.

Select the Filter entry. The Filters dialog box will open. Be sure the

Enable check box is selected and click once in the Title text entry field.

3.

Enter a name you have chosen for your filter. Use a name that has meaning to you.

4.

Select an option from the Type area. Click All to display all types of printers or Specify to only display a certain model of printer. Once

Specify has been selected, pick the desired printer type from the list.

This will set the filter to show only the selected printer types.

5.

Select an option from the Name area. Select the All button to display any named printers, or select Contains and then enter the text box to use to search for printers.

6.

Select an option from the Status area. Select Configured to display printers that have already been configured. Select Not Configured to only display printers that are not yet configured, or select Both to view all the printers.

7.

When finished, click once on OK to save the changes and exit the filters dialog.

NOTE: Not all printers supported by CentreWare DP can return their

Configured or Not Configured status. If this type of printer is not excluded in Name or Type area, both configured and unconfigured printers of this type will be displayed.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 49

Advanced Setup

Introduction

The Advanced Setup option of CentreWare DP gives you a tool to control how your devices are configured in your Novell NetWare network environment. This tool is necessary for connecting your device to more than one file server or queue.

Depending on the type of network to which you are installed, select one of the following two procedures:

Advanced Setup in Bindery Mode

Advanced Setup for NDS networks

Follow one of these procedures (depending on your version of NetWare) to quickly configure your device on the network.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 50

Advanced Setup in Bindery Mode

To Start Advanced Setup

1.

Highlight a printer in the Printers List.

2.

Select the Printer Menu and click Advanced Setup. The current

Primary Server and the Print Server Name are displayed on the upper portion of the Bindery Server TAB.

To Change the Primary Server your Printer Will

Service

1.

Click the Select Primary Server button. CentreWare DP will scan your network and present you with a list of the file servers present.

2.

Select a file server from the list or type a file server name and click

OK.

3.

If prompted, enter a user name and password that has supervisory (or equivalent) rights for the desired server and click Login.

To Create a Print Server

1.

Click the Create Print Server button. The Create Print Server dialog box appears.

2.

Type a print server name in the Print Server text box and click OK.

NOTE: You may choose a print server already defined from the drop-down list and make edited changes to help you with naming conventions.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 51

To Add/Remove A User Or Operator

1.

Click the Manage Print Server button. The Manage Print Server dialog box appears displaying two TABs: the User TAB and the

Operator TAB.

2.

To add a user or operator, highlight the desired selection from the

Available Users list and click Add>>. The selected item appears in the Assigned Users list.

3.

To delete a user or operator, highlight the desired selection under the

Assigned list and click <<Move.

4.

To assign a user as an operator, select the Operator TAB, highlight the user name in the Available Users list and click Add>>. The user name will appear in the Assigned Operators list.

To Notify A User

1.

Click the Notify List button. The Printer Notify dialog box appears.

2.

Highlight a user name in the Available Users list and click Add>>.

The user name appears in the Notify Users list.

3.

Highlight a users name in the Notify Users list, then click the Interval button. The Notify Interval dialog box appears.

4.

Set the notify intervals and click OK.

To Create A New Queue

1.

Select the file server to be used for the queue from the Available File

Servers drop-down list.

2.

Click the Create Queue button. The Create Queue dialog box appears.

3.

Enter the desired name for the new queue and click OK.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 52

To Attach A Queue To A Print Server

1.

Select a file server from the Available File Server drop-down list.

2.

Select a queue from the Available Queues drop-down list.

3.

Click the Attach Queue button. The queue name will appear in the

Queues serviced by the printer list.

To Delete A Queue

1.

Highlight the name of the queue in the Available Queues list.

2.

Click the Delete Queue button.

To Detach A Queue From A Print Server

1.

Highlight a queue in the Queues serviced by the printer list.

2.

Click the Detach Queues button. The queue name will be removed from the Queues serviced by the printer list.

To Send A Test Print To A Printer

1.

Highlight a queue in the Queues serviced by the printer list.

2.

Click the Test Print button. Click OK to exit Advanced Setup. If any configuration changes were made, the Wizard progress box will pop up and show your configuration progress. Your printer will initialize. A sample print job will be sent to the selected queue and printed by the attached printer.

To Manage An Existing Queue

1.

Select a queue from the Queues list serviced by the printer. Click the

Manage Queue button.

2.

The Queue Manager dialog box appears. This dialog has two TABs:

User and Operator.

3.

To add a user, highlight the desired selection from the Available Users list and click Add>>.

4.

To remove a user from the Assigned Users list, select the user name in the list, then click the <<Move button.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 53

5.

To add an operator to the queue, click the Operators TAB, then click the user name in the Available Users list. Click Add>>.

6.

To remove an operator from the Assigned Operators list, click the

Operators TAB. Click the user name in the Assigned Users list.

Click <<Move.

7.

Once you have finished with queue management click OK.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 54

Advanced Setup for NDS Networks

To Start Advanced Setup

1.

Highlight a printer in the Printers List.

2.

Select the Printer menu and click Advanced Setup. Click the NDS

TAB and the NDS window will appear. The Current Context, Tree, and the Print Server Context will be displayed in the upper portion of the NDS Server TAB.

To Change The NDS Tree

1.

Click the Select Tree button. A warning screen will appear stating that if you are already logged into an NDS Tree that you will be logged out.

Click Yes. The Select Tree dialog box appears. CentreWare DP will scan your network and create a list of trees available.

2.

Select the Tree from the Trees drop-down list, or type in the desired tree name, then click OK.

To Change The Print Server Context

1.

Click the Select Context button.

2.

Select a Context from the list or type in your selection and click OK.

To Create A Print Server

1.

Click the Create Print Server button. The Create Print Server dialog box appears.

2.

Type the Print Server name in the text box and click OK.

NOTE: You may choose a print server name already defined from the tree control list and make edited changes to help you with naming conventions.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 55

To Add/Remove A User, Operator Or Printer

1.

Highlight a print server from the Print Layout list. Click the Manage

Print Server button. The Print Server Manager dialog box appears with three TABs: the User TAB, the Operator TAB and the Printer

TAB. Each TAB consists of an Available Users list and an Assigned

Users list.

2.

To add a user, operator or printer, highlight the desired selection from the Available list and click Add>>. The selected item appears in the

Assigned list.

3.

To delete a user, operator or printer, highlight the desired selection under the Assigned list and click <<Move.

C E N T R E W A R E D P S O F T W A R E I N S T R U C T I O N S 56

To Add/Remove Users Or Operators To/From A Queue

1.

Highlight the queue in the Queues serviced by the printer list. Click the

Manage Queue button. The Queue Manager window appears. The window contains two TABs: User and Operator.

2.

Select the User or Operator TAB. The TABs consist of two lists:

Available Users and Assigned Users/Operators.

3.

To add a user or operator to the Assigned list, highlight the desired selection in the Available Users list and click Add>>. The selection will appear in the Assigned list.

4.

To remove a user or operator from the Assigned list, highlight the desired selection in the Assigned list and click <<Move.

To Detach A Queue

1.

Highlight the queue in the Queues serviced by the printer list and click the Detach Queue button. Click the Manage Queue button. The Queue

Manager window appears. The window contains four TABs: Users,

Operators, Create, and Delete.

2.

Click the Yes button in the pop-up box.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 1

Chapter 9

Internet Printer Services

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 2

Chapter Nine Contents

Chapter Introduction ................................ ................................ ...................... 3

Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ ... 3

Requirements ................................ ................................ ............................ 3

Configure Your Web Browser ................................ ................................ ........ 4

Procedure................................ ................................ ................................ .. 4

Internet Services Quick Tour ................................ ................................ ......... 5

How to Use Internet Services................................ ................................ ..... 5

Internet Services Help ................................ ................................ ............... 5

Common Information................................ ................................ ................. 5

The Home Page ................................ ................................ ............................ 6

Buttons ................................ ................................ ................................ ...... 6

The Print Page................................ ................................ ............................... 7

Buttons ................................ ................................ ................................ ...... 7

Controls................................ ................................ ................................ ..... 7

The Print Page with File download selected ................................ ............... 8

The Print Page with Standard pages selected ................................ ............ 8

The Status Page ................................ ................................ .......................... 10

Controls................................ ................................ ................................ ... 10

The Status Page with general selected ................................ .................... 10

The Status Page with consumables selected ................................ ........... 11

The Status Page with configuration selected................................ ............ 12

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 3

Chapter Introduction

Overview

Your DocuPrint printer includes an integrated Web Server.

This means you can now check up on your printer status using your favorite Web Browser software. This section will show you how to set up this feature.

In addition to monitoring your printer this tool can be used to change the configuration of your printer, submit print jobs, and, once configured, use the printer’s settings to set up additional printers.

The type of network (Internet or Intranet) to which your

DocuPrint printer is connected will determine how Internet

Services will be enabled.

Requirements

It is recommended but not mandatory that you install a

Java-enabled browser on the workstation(s) which will use the Internet Services Tool. For best performance and compatibility use Netscape Navigator 3.0 or Microsoft

Internet Explorer 3.0 or later.

You printer and workstation(s) must be connected to a network which has the TCP/IP protocol enabled.

These procedures assume a general knowledge of your network type and the operation of your web browser software.

It is recommended that you set both Subnet Mask and

Default Gateway parameters if your printer is on an internetwork with more than 1 segment. These parameters are optional if you are not communicating to your printer over a WAN.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 4

Configure Your Web Browser

This procedure will configure your web browser software to connect to your printer on the network.

Procedure

1.

Consult the section in Chapter 2 entitled Set An IP

Address and assign your printer a TCP/IP address.

2.

Perform the steps in the Chapter 2 section entitled Print a

Print Settings Page and retain the page for the steps below.

3.

Launch your web browser software.

4.

Enter your printer’s TCP/IP address from your Print

Settings Page into the Address or Location field on your browser (this name is browser dependent) and press

[RETURN].

5.

Your browser will connect to the embedded web server on your printer and display the printer’s “Home Page.”

6.

Once you have established communication with your printer, be sure to save the URL in your Favorites, or

Bookmarks (this name is also browser dependent), so you can quickly reconnect when necessary.

NOTE: To make it easier for browser software to find the printer, be sure to update your DNS or NIS to include the printer.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 5

Internet Services Quick Tour

How to Use Internet Services

The most common uses of Internet Services are sending print jobs, and monitoring consumables (toners, developers, paper).

This section provides details on these functions.

Internet Services Help

To receive further information on other functions, all of the pages in Internet Services have context-sensitive HTMLbased Help available.

Internet Services Help can be started right from your browser. Click the Help button at the bottom right corner of the page for information on the page you are browsing.

Common Information

Once your have started your browser and connected to the printer, review the information in the left column. This column will contain the following information about the device currently being sent pages, or being monitored:

Name

IP Address

Model

Location

Status (to update click the Refresh Status button)

Refresh Status Button

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 6

The Home Page

Buttons

There are two buttons and links at the top of the page which are used to point to other locations for information regarding your printer:

Internet Services

Device List Button

Device Index

Button

This button at the top right corner of the page will send you to the

URL for the CentreWare Device

List Page to select a new device.

This button at the top right corner of the page will send you to the

URL for the currently selected device Contents Page.

There are six buttons and links in the center of the page which are used to send you to the corresponding page:

Print Button

Select this button to use your

Internet Services to print documents directly to your printer.

Status Button

Settings Button

Select this button to display information on consumables and configuration of your printer.

Select this button to display or modify your printer’s current settings.

Maintenance

Button

Assistance Button

Select this button to perform print testing on your printer.

Select this button to display a list of sources for help.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 7

The Print Page

Buttons

There are three buttons at the top of the page which are used to point to other locations for information regarding your printer:

Internet Services

Device List Button

This button at the top right corner of the page will send you to the URL for the CentreWare Device List Page to select a new device.

Device Home

Button

Device Index

Button

This button at the top right corner of the page will send you to the URL for the currently selected device Home

Page.

This button at the top right corner of the page will send you to the URL for the currently selected device Contents

Page.

Controls

Also on this page are two controls at the top of the folder:

• file download

• standard pages

These controls change what print jobs are sent to the printer and will also change the appearance of your screen.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 8

The Print Page with File download selected

Once file download has been selected, the right column contains these features for file download:

File:

Browse Button

Start Button

TO UPLOAD A PRINT-READY FILE TO THE

DEVICE

1.

Enter the name of the file you wish to upload, or click the

Browse... button and select the file from a local or remote disk.

2.

Click the Start button. You may repeat this procedure for another file or click one of the other device TABs.

The Print Page with Standard pages selected

Once standard pages has been selected, the right column contains the information fields for sending standard pages.

Standard File:

Quantity (1-99)

Tray

Start Button

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 9

TO HAVE THE DEVICE PRINT ONE OF THE

STANDARD TEST PAGES

1.

Click on the Standard File: drop-list menu arrow and select the name of the file you wish to have printed.

2.

If multiple copies are desired, enter the desired amount in the Quantity entry field.

3.

If your printer is equipped with two trays, pick the desired tray from the Tray drop-list.

4.

When all parameters are set correctly, click the Start button.

5.

Once the print(s) are complete, you may repeat this procedure for another page or click one of the other device TABs to exit the Print Page.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 10

The Status Page

Controls

On this page are three controls at the top of the folder:

general consumables

Displays general status information.

Displays consumable usage information.

configuration

Displays hardware configuration information.

These controls change the appearance of the right column of the page by displaying different sets of parameters for the selected device.

The Status Page with general selected

Once the general button is selected, the right column contains the following information about the currently selected device:

PAPER TRAYS

Tray

Size

Media

Capacity

Default

Displays multiple trays if installed.

Displays the size of media in that tray.

Displays the type of media in that tray.

Displays the status of media in that tray.

Displays whether that tray is the current default.

PAGE COUNTS

Total Page Count

Black Impression Count

Cyan Impression Count

Magenta Impression Count

Yellow Impression Count

POLLING INTERVAL

Refresh Interval (1-60 minutes)

Auto Refresh All Status Pages (Check this button to enable automatic refresh.)

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 11

The Status Page with consumables selected

Once the consumables button has been selected, the right column contains the following information about the currently selected device:

CONSUMABLES

Black Toner

Displays Okay or Empty in status column.

Cyan Toner

Displays Okay or Empty in status column.

Magenta Toner

Displays Okay or Empty in status column.

Yellow Toner

Displays Okay or Empty in status column.

Oil Kit

Displays Okay or Empty in status column.

Toner Collector

Displays Okay or Full in status column.

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Black Developer

Displays percent remaining in right column.

Color Developer

Displays percent remaining in right column.

Print drum

Displays percent remaining in right column.

Fuser

Displays percent remaining in right column.

I N T E R N E T P R I N T E R S E R V I C E S 12

The Status Page with configuration selected

Once the configuration button has been selected, the right column contains the following information about the currently selected device:

CONFIGURATION STATUS

Status Parameter

Possible Values

Machine Model

C55, C55mp

Software Version

Engine Software Version

Software Part Number

Serial Number

RAM Size

Base (Onboard)RAM

J8/J9 (Bank 0) RAM

J10/J11 (Bank 1) RAM

Contains software version number

Contains software version number

For Internal Use

Contains printer serial number

Total install RAM in MBytes

8 MBytes

Amount in MBytes

Amount in MBytes

Continuous Tone Enabled

Yes,No

PCL 5C Installed

Yes,No

PostScript Installed

Yes,No

Adobe PostScript Version

Contains PostScript revision level

Hard Disk Installed

Hard Disk Size

Hard Disk Free

Media Server Installed

Tray 2 Installed

Yes,No in MBytes in MBytes

Yes,No

Yes,No

Ethernet Card Installed

Ethernet Card Revision

Yes,No contains firmware version number

Token Ring Card Installed

Yes,No

Token Ring Card Revision

Contains firmware version number

Serial Port Installed

LocalTalk Installed

Yes,No

Yes,No

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 1

Chapter 10

DocuPrint C55 Control Panel

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 2

Chapter Ten Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ ............................. 3

Purpose ................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 3

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ............................ 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 3

Organization................................ ................................ ................................ ............................ 4

Control Panel Description................................ ................................ ................................ ........5

Control Panel Indicator Lights................................ ................................ ................................ ..6

Control Panel Buttons ................................ ................................ ................................ .............7

How To Use The Control Panel ................................ ................................ ............................... 9

Menu System Navigation ................................ ................................ ................................ ....9

Top Level Menu Overview ................................ ................................ ................................ ....11

Control Panel Menus - Control ................................ ................................ .............................. 14

Control Panel Menus - Maintenance................................ ................................ ...................... 15

Control Panel Menus - Media ................................ ................................ ................................ 16

Control Panel Menus - Print ................................ ................................ ................................ ..17

Control Panel Menus - Multinational ................................ ................................ ...................... 18

Control Menus - Communications................................ ................................ .......................... 19

Control Panel Menus - Setup................................ ................................ ................................ .31

Control Menus - Service................................ ................................ ................................ ........37

Control Panel Menus - Imaging ................................ ................................ ............................. 40

Control Panel Menus - Media Server (optional) ................................ ................................ .....41

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 3

Introduction

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to outline all of the Control Panel menus that manually control printer functions at the printer. The printer factory default settings are sufficient to operate your

DocuPrint printer in most situations, but certain operating environments may require modification of some of the Control Panel settings.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to present all of the DocuPrint Control

Panel menus, including all the menu-related information you need to be able to monitor and configure your DocuPrint printer.

Many of the Control Panel selections can also be altered with the

CentreWare DP software supplied with your printer. Detailed information regarding the software monitoring and configuration of your printer is available in the chapter entitled CentreWare DP

Software Instructions.

Requirements

For proper operation of the printer’s Control Panel it is recommended that you review the section in this chapter entitled

How to Use the Control Panel.

A working knowledge of the parameters that you will be verifying or changing is necessary before modifying Control Panel settings.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 4

Organization

This chapter contains detailed information on the printer’s Control

Panel including:

Indicator Lights

Description of Control Panel Indicator lights and their purpose.

Control Panel Buttons

Description of Control Panel buttons and their purpose.

How To Use The Control Panel

Menu System Navigation

Top Level Menu Overview

A brief explanation of the ten Top Level Menus in table form.

Detailed Tables Of Information For All Control Panel Menus And

Submenus

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 5

Control Panel Description

The purpose of this page is to familiarize you with the location of the

DocuPrint C55/C55mp printer Control Panel LEDs and buttons.

Details on these LEDs and buttons are available in the sections of this chapter entitled Control Panel Indicator Lights and Control Panel

Buttons respectively.

Control Panel key

Œ

On Line LED

Form Feed LED

Ž

Message Display Window

Four Color Pass LEDs

Control Panel Buttons

NOTE: If included in your printer packaging, you may want to place the appropriate language overlay on your Control Panel buttons.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 6

Control Panel Indicator Lights

There are a total of six LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) on the

DocuPrint printer’s Control Panel.

The table below references the LEDs and their purposes.

INDICATOR

LIGHTS

PURPOSE

On Line LED

Form Feed LED

Four Color Pass

LED

Steady light indicates the printer is idle and on line.

Flashing light indicates the printer is processing data. No light indicates the printer is off line.

Steady light indicates that a PCL 5C document is in memory but that the printer has not yet received an endof-paper character.

The steady light indicates which color toner is currently being applied during the printing process. The light will flash if the individual color toner is empty (the printer cannot make a color pass).

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 7

Control Panel Buttons

The Control Panel buttons are on the front of the printer under the

LEDs and the display window. The function of each button is listed below.

ON-LINE

Press to toggle between an on-line or an off-line state (See also Indicator Lights ON-LINE - FORM

FEED). When on line, the printer is able to receive information and communicate with connected workstations. When off line, information cannot be received by the printer. The printer must be off line in order for the Control Panel menus to be accessed.

FORM FEED

Press to eject a page. This button is also used to release a print job that has been held at the printer or to cause the print to print a job on a different paper format when the selected paper is unavailable.

MEDIA

SERVER

If you have the optional Media Server installed on your printer, this button will access the Media

Server menus. Use it to set defaults for jobs created with applications that do not supply information directly to the printer.

MENU

Press to access the Top Menu selection

<CONTROL MENUS>. The Menu button is only operational when the printer is in the off-line state.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 8

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (continued)

NEXT

Press to cycle through the ten Top Menus. After accessing a Top Menu, press to cycle through the submenus.

PREVIOUS

Press to move to a previous Top Menu. After accessing a Top Menu, press to move to the previous selection in a submenu.

SHIFT

Moves to the next field or menu item. When entering a numeric value, this button moves the cursor to the next digit position.

ENTER

When in a menu or submenu, this button is used to select the currently displayed menu or submenu.

When scrolling through a list of possible values, this button is used to accept the currently displayed value.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 9

How To Use The Control Panel

Menu System Navigation

You begin all Control Panel tasks by taking the printer off line and selecting a Top Menu. Follow the steps below for a line-by-line view of any one of the Top Menus in the Control Panel’s Message Display window.

1.

Press the On Line button, located immediately below the

Message Display window. The <ON LINE> message is cleared, and <OFF LINE> is displayed.

NOTE: The printer must be off line to access Control Panel menus.

2.

Press the Menu button, located immediately below the Message

Display window, to start at the top of the menu structure. The

<OFF LINE> message is cleared, and the Top Menu

<CONTROL MENU> is displayed.

The menu selection displayed between the < > symbols is the active menu. The first Top Menu topic displayed is the Control Menu.

3.

Press the Previous and Next buttons, located immediately below the Message Display window, to scroll through the ten Top

Menus. (Press the Next button to display the next menu item.

Press the Previous button to display the previously displayed menu item.)

4.

Press Menu to start at or return to the beginning of a Top Menu.

OR

Press Enter when <EXIT THIS MENU> is displayed in order to exit the menu.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 10

5.

Press the Enter button to select a menu. The first sub-level menu option is displayed in the Message Display window.

6.

Use the Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the sub-level menu options.

7.

Press the Enter button to select a menu option, execute the menu command that is displayed, and complete the task.

NOTE: The Enter button executes the displayed menu command and will take you to the next sub-level menu option.

8.

Press the Menu button to start at or return to a Top Menu.

OR

Press Enter when <EXIT THIS MENU> is displayed, in order to exit the menu.

9.

Press the On Line button to end menu navigation and put the printer back on line again. Any settings you have changed since the printer went off line will be saved when the printer goes on line.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 11

Top Level Menu Overview

There are ten main (Top Level) menus which are further divided into submenus. In the table below, the Top Level Menus and their

Functions are defined. In subsequent pages of this chapter, the sublevel menu choices, factory default values, and requirements are defined. Each Top Level Menu is given its own start page for clarity.

TOP MENU

Control Menu Cancel a job.

Reset the printer.

Maintenance Check the status of

Consumables and

Maintenance Items.

Media Menu

Print

FUNCTION

Set and customize the defaults for media trays and quantity to print.

Print the configuration for print settings and resident fonts.

SUB-MENU

SELECTIONS

Cancel a job

Reset the printer

Color Developer/ Black

Developer

Print Drum

Fuser

Page Counts

Default Tray

Auto Tray Switch

Transparency Tray

Custom Size

Print Startup Page

Print Settings

Print PCL Fonts

Print PS Fonts

Print Menu

Print Demos (PCL,

PostScript, Hard Drive)

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 12

The Ten Top Menus (continued)

TOP MENU

Multinational

FUNCTION

Change the language used for messages and documents at the printer and at your computer.

Communications Enable and configure the data ports. Establish the network configuration.

Setup Menu Make color adjustments, configure Startup Page, set printer timeout values, and configure for PCL emulation. Also enables a factory reset.

SUB-MENU

SELECTIONS

English

French

Italian

German

Spanish

Portuguese

Parallel

Serial

LocalTalk

Network Setup

Color Adjust

Configuration

Timing

Support Info

Memory

PostScript

PCL Emulation

Factory Reset

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 13

The Ten Top Menus (continued)

TOP MENU

Service

Imaging

Media Server

FUNCTION

Print test patterns, view software levels and error logs.

Change defaults for

Imaging and Color Mode

Options.

Select a standard High

Density, 3.5 inch, MS

DOS formatted disk file to print.

SUB-MENU

SELECTIONS

Test Patterns

Lossy Counter

Show SW Level

Show Memory

Error Logs

Adjustments

Reset CRU

Show TC set points

Disk Services

Edge Smoothing

Color Mode

Overprint

Halftone Type

Enhanced Alignment

Process Black

Select File

Setup

Mode

Quantity

Tray

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 14

Control Panel Menus - Control

The Control menu has only two features. Both of these features force the printer to perform the indicated function.

CONTROL

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Cancel Job?

Reset Printer?

Choices

PostScript jobs only Yes

No

Yes

No

Default

Yes

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 15

Control Panel Menus - Maintenance

The Maintenance menu displays information about consumables usage. There are no requirements and no default values.

Use the Maintenance Menu for the following reasons:

To view the percentage of usage remaining on certain consumable and maintenance items.

To view the overall page count for the printer, and the individual page count for each color.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing possible values.

MAINTENANCE

Feature Name

Black Dev Cart

Color Dev Cart

Print Drum

Fuser Module

Page Counts

Total count

Black count

Cyan count

Magenta count

Yellow count

Possible Values

% of usage remaining

% of usage remaining

% of usage remaining

% of usage remaining counter counter counter counter counter

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 16

Control Panel Menus - Media

The Media menu is used to set defaults for jobs created with applications that do not supply this information to the printer. If the media information is not selected in the job sent from your workstation, the defaults set here will apply to your print job.

Refer to the User Guide for Media Specifications and paper tray information.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

MEDIA

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Default Tray

Auto Tray

Transparency

Custom Size

Tray 2 installed

Tray 2 installed

Tray 2 installed

Tray 1

Tray 2

On

Off

None

Tray 1

Tray 2

8.5x13

Invoice

SP Folio

8 x 10

A5

B5

Factory

Default

Tray 1

On

None

8.5x13

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 17

Control Panel Menus - Print

The Print menu offers a quick way to print out the printer’s current settings, font lists, and a complete listing of the Control Panel menus.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

PRINT

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Startup

Settings

PCL fonts

PostScript Fonts Must have

PostScript option installed

Values

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Menu

Demos Hard Drive option requires Hard

Drive installed

Yes

No

PCL

PostScript

Hard Drive

Quantity 1-99

Tray 1

Tray 2 installed

Run Job

Yes/No

Factory

Default

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

PCL

1

Tray 1

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 18

Control Panel Menus - Multinational

Use the Multinational menu to change the language of the messages that appear on the Display Panel, on the pages that you can print from the Print Menu, and on messages that are sent from the printer to the workstation.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing their possible entry values and factory defaults. There are no requirements.

MULTINATIONAL

Feature Name

Multinational

Possible

Values

English

Francais

Italiano

Deutsch

Español

Português

Factory Default

English

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 19

Control Menus - Communications

The Communications menu is used to establish the direct connect communication and network links necessary for the printer and connected workstations to communicate with each other.

In most printer installations, the factory defaults are sufficient to start printing immediately.

The submenus of the Communications Menu are as follows:

Parallel

Serial

LocalTalk

Network Setup submenu with these parameters

Ethernet

Token Ring

EtherTalk/TokenTalk

IPX

TCP/IP

NetBEUI

SNMP

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 20

COMMUNICATIONS MENU - PARALLEL SUBMENU

The Parallel submenu of the Communications Menu is used to enable/disable the use of the parallel port, change the mode in which the port accepts print jobs, and set the method of handshaking used to communicate with the workstation.

The table below gives a complete list of the submenu features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

PARALLEL

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Enable

Mode PostScript & PCL installed

Yes

No

Auto Select

PS Normal

PS Binary

PS TBCP

Handshake Bi-directional

Uni-directional

Factory

Default

Yes

Auto Select

Bidirectional

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 21

COMMUNICATIONS MENU - SERIAL SUBMENU

The Serial submenu gives you control over the settings of the

DocuPrint printer’s serial port. As shown in the table below, you may enable/disable the serial port, set baud rate and parity, change the number of stop bits, and select the method of flow control.

The table below gives a complete list of the submenu features showing their requirements, possible entries, and factory defaults.

SERIAL

Feature Name

Enable

Mode

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Flow Control

Requirements

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

PostScript & PCL installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

Possible

Values

Yes

No

Auto Select

PS Normal

PS Binary

PS TBCP

1

2

7

8

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

Odd

Even

Mark

Space

None

Xon/Xoff

DTR

Factory

Default

Yes

Auto Select

9600

8

1

None

Xon/Xoff

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 22

COMMUNICATIONS MENU - LOCALTALK SUBMENU

The LocalTalk submenu is used to enable/disable the LocalTalk port on your DocuPrint printer.

LOCALTALK

Feature Name

Enable

Requirements

Serial/LocalTalk option installed

PostScript installed

Possible

Values

Yes

No

Factory

Default

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 23

COMMUNICATIONS MENU - NETWORK SETUP

SUBMENU

The Network Setup submenu is an extensive set of features grouped under the communications category.

You may use this submenu and its features to configure network card parameters. CentreWare DP software may also be used to set many of these values.

Consult the following tables for a complete list of available features.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 24

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - ETHERNET

The Ethernet submenu contains the selections for enabling the

Ethernet card and selecting the connector which receives print jobs.

The table below gives a complete list of the features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

ETHERNET

Feature

Name

Enable

Connector

Requirements Possible Values Factory

Default

Ethernet only

Ethernet only

Yes

No

RJ45

BNC

Read only--not settable.

Yes

N/A

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 25

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU -TOKEN RING

The Token Ring submenu contains the selections for enabling the

Token Ring card and selecting the connector which receives print jobs.

The table below gives a complete list of the features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

TOKEN RING

Feature Name Requirements Possible Values Factory

Default

Enable

Connector

Speed

Token Ring only

Token Ring only

Token Ring only

Yes

No

RJ45

DB9

Read only--not settable.

16

4

Yes

N/A

16

Source Routing Token Ring only Yes

No

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 26

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - ETHERTALK/TOKENTALK

The EtherTalk/TokenTalk submenu contains the selections for enabling EtherTalk/TokenTalk, changing the Phase used, viewing the

AppleTalk zone and selecting the mode in which the printer will receive print jobs.

The table below gives a complete list of the features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

ETHERTALK

TOKENTALK

Feature Name

Enable

Phase

Zone

Mode

Ethernet only

Token Ring only

Requirements Possible

Values

READ ONLY

PostScript & PCL installed

1

2

Yes

No text

PS

Auto Select

Factory

Default

Yes

2

*

Auto Select

* - Indicates actual Appletalk zone name used on your network.

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 27

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - IPX

The IPX submenu contains the selections for enabling the IPX protocol, changing the Frame type used for Ethernet or Token Ring, viewing the Primary Server, Pserver Name, Primary Tree, Context, and selecting the mode in which the printer will accept print jobs in an

IPX environment.

The table below gives a complete list of the features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

IPX

NIC installed

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Printer Server

Enable

Phase

Zone

Mode

IPX Encapsule

IPX Encapsule

Scan Rate

Pserver Name

Primary Server

Primary Tree

Context

2

1

Yes

No

READ ONLY

PostScript & PCL installed

Ethernet only

PS

Auto Select

Adaptive

802.3

Ethernet II

802.2

Ethernet

SNAP

Token Ring only

Used for Netware

3.x

text text

Used for NDS only text

Used for NDS only text

2

5

10

20

30

Adaptive

802.5

802.5 SNAP

Factory

Default

Yes

Auto Select

Adaptive

Adaptive

5 none none none none

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 28

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - TCP/IP

The TCP/IP submenu contains selections enabling you to change such parameters as how IP addressing is accomplished, defining gateway masks, defining subnet masks, enabling and adjusting LPR operation, and enabling Telnet or Appsocket.

The table below gives a complete list of the submenu items showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

TCP/IP

Telnet Status

Enable

Telnet Menu Enable

NIC installed

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Print Host

IP Addressing

Set IP Address

TFTP Enable

Gateway

Net Mask

LPR Enable

LPR Mode

LPR Banner

Appsocket Enable

Appsocket Mode

READ ONLY

PostScript & PCL installed

PostScript & PCL installed text

RARP/BOOTP

DHCP

Static xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x

Yes

No xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x xxx.xxx.xxx.xx

x

Yes

No

Auto Select

PS

Yes

No

Yes

No

Auto Select

PS

Yes

No

Yes

No

Factory

Default

none

RARP/

BOOTP

N/A

Yes

N/A

N/A

Yes

Auto Select

Yes

Yes

Auto Select

Yes

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 29

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - NETBEUI

The NetBEUI submenu allows you to enable the Microsoft NetBEUI protocol and view the information which is utilized by a Microsoft network.

The table below gives a complete list of the features and factory defaults.

NETBEUI

NIC installed

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Enable

Group

Name

READ ONLY

READ ONLY

Yes

No text text

Remark

Service

READ ONLY

READ ONLY text text

Factory

Default

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 30

NETWORK SETUP SUBMENU - SNMP

The SNMP submenu allows you to view the information which is utilized by the SNMP protocol.

The table below gives a complete list of the submenu items and factory defaults.

SNMP

Feature Name

System Contact

System Name

System Location

NIC installed

Requirements Possible

READ ONLY

READ ONLY

READ ONLY

Values

text text text

Factory

Default

N/A

N/A

N/A

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 31

Control Panel Menus - Setup

The Setup menu is designed to allow the user to make color adjustments, configure the generation of a Startup Page, set printer timeout values, create support information for display, and configure the printer for PCL emulation.

SETUP MENU - COLOR ADJUST SUBMENU

The table below gives a complete list of the features, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

COLOR ADJUST

Feature Name Possible Values

Color Density

Black Density

Color Balance

OK All Changes

Cancel Changes

Defaults

Choose Number 1-6

Are You Sure? Yes/No

Choose Number 7-12

Are You Sure? Yes/No

Choose Number 13-24

Are You Sure? Yes/No

Yes/No

Are You Sure? Yes/No

Are You Sure? Yes/No

Factory

Default

1

Yes

7

Yes

13

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

SETUP MENU - CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

The table below gives a complete list of the features, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

CONFIGURATION

Feature

Name

Startup Page

Media Server

Enable

Requirements Possible

Values

Yes

No

Media server installed Yes

No

Factory

Default

Yes

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 32

SETUP MENU - TIMING SUBMENU

The table below gives a complete list of the features, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

TIMING

Feature Name

Wait Timeout

Factory Default

60 seconds

Manual Timeout

Hold Timeout

Power Saver

Possible Values

20 seconds

40

60

5 minutes never

1 minute

2

5

10

30 never

4

5

2

3

30 seconds

1 minute

10 minutes

30

60

120

300 never

2 minutes

1 minute

30 minutes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 33

SETUP MENU - SUPPORT INFO SUBMENU

Use the Support Info submenu to record names and phone numbers you will need when requesting service or ordering supplies.

SUPPORT INFO

Feature Name

Printer Name

Serial Number

Xerox Service #

Xerox Supply #

Dealer Service #

Dealer Supply #

Possible Values

text

Machine Serial Number text text text text

Factory Default

DocuPrint C55

Factory Serial No.

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

SETUP MENU - MEMORY SUBMENU

The Memory submenu displays the amount of memory installed in your printer. Use this menu to adjust the amount of memory used by the Input buffer and the Font Cache.

MEMORY

Feature Name Possible

Values

Input buffer

Font Cache

Factory Default

User selectable Default based on installed RAM

User selectable Default based on installed RAM

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 34

SETUP MENU - POSTSCRIPT

The PostScript submenu allows you to set parameters for PostScript print jobs.

The table below gives a list of the features, possible value entries, and factory defaults. There are no specific requirements.

POSTSCRIPT

Feature Name

Page Policy

Possible Values

Auto Size

Request Size

Factory Default

Auto Size

SETUP MENU - PCL EMULATION SUBMENU

The PCL Emulation submenu allows you to set parameters for PCL.

The table below gives a list of the features, possible value entries, and factory defaults. There are no specific requirements.

PCL

EMULATION

Feature Name

Orientation

Line Wrap

Possible Values

Portrait

Landscape

On

Off

Factory Default

Portrait

Off

Set Font

Font Number

Font Pitch

Font Height

0-72

.44 - 99.99

4.0 - 999.75

0

.44

4.0

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 35

PCL EMULATION TABLE (CONTINUED)

PCL

EMULATION

Symbol Set

Roman-8

ISO Latin 1

ISO Latin 2

ISO Latin 5

PC-8

PC-8 Danish/Norwegian

PC-850

PC-852

PC-8 Turkish

Windows Latin 1

Windows Latin 2

Windows Latin 5

Desktop

PS Text

VN Intl

VN US

MS Publishing

Math 8

PS Math

VN Math

PI Font

Legal

ISO-4

ISO-6

ISO-11

ISO-15

ISO-17

ISO-21

ISO-60

ISO-69

Windows 3.0

Roman-8

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 36

SETUP MENU - FACTORY RESET SUBMENU

This submenu facilitates the resetting of all printer parameters to the factory defaults.

FACTORY RESET

Feature Name

Factory Reset

Possible Values Factory Default

Yes

No

No

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 37

Control Menus - Service

Use the Service menu to quickly test print quality, provide error log information, reset CRUs, and format the hard drive. This menu would typically be used by a Systems Administrator or a service technician.

The table below gives a complete list of the features showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

SERVICE

Feature

Name

Test Patterns

Requirements Possible

Values

Print PQ Set Yes

No

Pattern Type

PCL

Test Pattern A

100% Stripe

Color Balance

Yellow Step

Magenta Step

Cyan Step

Black Step

Blank

Gray Halftone

PostScript

PostScript Option Test Pattern A

Color Balance

IOT Stripe

Quantity 1-99

Tray 1

Tray 2

Run Test Job

Yes/No

Diagnostics Yes

No

Factory

Default

Yes

Test Pattern A

Test Pattern A

Tray 1

Yes

Yes

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 38

Service Menu (continued)

Feature Name

Lossy Counter

Show SW level

Show Memory

Requirements Possible

Values

Factory

Default

Binary

Contone

Software info N/A

Shows loaded

RAM

N/A

Error Logs

Active Faults

N/A

Fault History

Adjustments

Shows active faults

Shows last 50 faults

Left Margin

(-4 to 0 to

+4)

Top Margin

(-4 to 0 to

+4)

30

40

50

60

Cleaning

Cycle

10 images

20

70

80

90

100

Never

Patch Control

OFF

ON

N/A

0

0

Never

ON

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 39

Service Menu (continued)

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Reset CRU

Reset K Dev

Reset CMY Dev

Reset Prt Drum

Reset Fuser

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Show Setpoints

Black TC

Cyan TC

Magenta TC

Yellow TC

Disk Services Must have hard disk

Counters

Counters

Counters

Counters

Format Disk Are You

Sure?

Yes/No

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

No

Factory

Default

No

No

No

No

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 40

Control Panel Menus - Imaging

The Imaging menu allows you to change the default modes in which the DocuPrint printer will render graphics, text, and bitmaps. All of the features contained in this menu can be set using the CentreWare

DP software application.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

IMAGING

Feature Name Requirements Possible

Values

Edge Smoothing

Color Mode

Overprint

Halftone Type

Enh. Alignment

Process Black

On

Off

PostScript installed Vivid

Photo

Unadjusted

PostScript installed On

Off

PostScript installed Quad Dot

Smooth Screen

Contone

On

Off

PostScript installed On

Off

Factory

Default

On

Unadjusted

On

Smooth

Screen

Off

Off

D O C U P R I N T C O N T R O L P A N E L 41

Control Panel Menus - Media Server (optional)

The Media Server option allows non-networked Macintosh and PC users to print PostScript or EPS files from a DOS formatted disk.

The performance of EPS files may vary depending on the method of creation. Other types of files may cause printer errors and may not print.

Use only 3.5-inch disks that are DOS formatted (5.0 or greater).

Macintosh users should use Apple File Exchange

®

to copy files to

MS-DOS formatted disks.

Complete information about using the Media Server is provided in your User Guide.

The table below gives a complete list of the menu items showing their requirements, possible entry values, and factory defaults.

MEDIA SERVER

Feature

Name

Select File

Setup

Mode

Quantity

Tray

Requirements

PostScript available in PostScript systems

Tray 2 installed

Possible Values

Lists available files N/A

PostScript

PCL Emulation

Auto Select

1-99

Tray 1

Tray 2

Factory

Default

Auto Select

1

Tray 1

Chapter 11

Error Code List

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 1

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 2

Chapter Eleven Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Purpose ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................... 3

Objective ................................ ................................ ................................ ......................... 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 3

Organization................................ ................................ ................................ ......................... 4

C Series--Paper Cassette Errors ................................ ................................ .......................... 5

E Series--Jam/Component Integrity Errors ................................ ................................ ........... 6

F Series--Media Server Errors................................ ................................ .............................. 7

H Series--Hard Drive Errors ................................ ................................ ................................ . 7

J Series--Consumables Errors................................ ................................ .............................. 8

W Series--Low Consumable/End-of-Use Errors ................................ ................................ .... 9

T Series--Print Hardware Errors ................................ ................................ ......................... 10

U Series--Print Hardware Errors ................................ ................................ ......................... 11

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 3

Introduction

Purpose

Error codes are generated to assist users and System Administrators in servicing and supporting the DocuPrint printer. The messages displayed at the Control Panel are designed to be as informative as possible. In the event an error code appears, consult the tables listed in this chapter to find the probable cause and the recommended, corrective action to take. This is a complete list of all engine-related error codes. Consult your DocuPrint User

Guide for a quick reference to the most common codes.

Objective

The objective of this chapter is to enable you to minimize printer downtime and to schedule consumable replacement when it will have minimal impact on your productivity.

Requirements

A working knowledge of the terminology of the parts of your DocuPrint printer.

A working knowledge of the consumables used in the DocuPrint printer.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 4

Organization

This chapter is organized by the prefix letter of the error codes, as follows:

C Series

E Series

Paper Cassette Errors

Jam/Component Integrity Errors

F SeriesMedia Server Errors

H Series

J Series

W Series

T Series

U Series

Hard Drive Errors

Consumables Errors

Low Consumable/End of Use Errors

Print Hardware Errors

Print Hardware Errors

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 5

C Series--Paper Cassette Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate that it is unable to obtain media from the desired paper source. This may be caused by a tray not being fully seated in the printer, or by the tray being empty.

Window Message Probable Cause

C1 - CHECK TRAY 1

Tray 1 not sensed.

C2 - CHECK TRAY 2

Tray 2 not sensed.

Corrective Action

Reseat Tray 1 if not fully inserted.

Reseat Tray 2 if not fully inserted.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 6

E Series--Jam/Component Integrity Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate that media is not progressing through the printer as it should. This may be corrected by opening the printer and clearing the media in the area indicated by the error code.

Window Message Probable

Cause

E1- TRAY 1 JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E2-TRAY 2 JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E3-MANUAL FEED JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E4-INPUT JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E5-FUSER JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E6-DRUM JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E7-PRINT DRUM JAM

OPEN PRINTER

E8-OUTPUT JAM

OPEN PRINTER

Corrective Action

Jam in Tray 1.

Remove Tray 1 and check for misfed paper.

Jam in Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 and check for misfed paper.

Jam in

Manual Feed area.

Jam in input roller area.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from Manual

Feed.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from Lower

Roller area.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from Fuser area.

Jam in fuser area.

Jam in transfer drum area.

Jam in Print

Drum area.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from Transfer

Drum area.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from Print Drum area.

Jam in Output

Roller area.

Open Front Shell and remove jammed paper from

Fuser/Output Roller area.

Printer Open.

If open, close Rear Cover and

Front Shell.

E9-PLEASE CLOSE

PRINTER

EA-COLOR DEV

MISINSTALLED

EB-BLACK DEV

MISINSTALLED

EC-PRINT DRUM

MISINSTALLED

Open front shell and reseat

CRU.

Open front shell and reseat

CRU.

Open front shell and reseat

CRU.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 7

F Series--Media Server Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate problems with the

Media Server (floppy disk drive).

Window Message

F1 - DISK ERROR

F2 - DISK I/O ERROR

F3 - ACTION FAILED

Probable Cause Corrective

Action

Floppy Disk dirty.

Floppy file error.

Replace disk and retry.

Copy file again and retry.

File upload incomplete.

Rebuild print ready file and retry.

H Series--Hard Drive Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate problems with the hard disk drive.

Window Message

H1 - HARD DISK ERROR

H2 - CONTROLLER ERROR

H3 – HARD DISK IS FULL

H4 – PLEASE FORMAT DISC

Probable Cause

Bad Sector on hard disk.

On board controller not communicating with hard disk.

Disk has too many print jobs spooled, or too many fonts stored.

Bad sector on hard drive.

Corrective

Action

Retry print job.

Retry job. If not successful call Support.

Spool smaller files, or delete fonts and retry.

Reformat drive.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 8

J Series--Consumables Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate the need to refill consumables (toner), or the need to replace the Developer Unit, Fuser, or

Toner Collector.

Window Message Probable Cause Corrective

Action

J1 - ADD YELLOW TONER

J2 - ADD MAGENTA TONER

J3 - ADD CYAN TONER

J4 - ADD BLACK TONER

Yellow toner level low.

Refill

YELLOW toner hopper.

Magenta toner level low.

Refill

MAGENTA toner hopper.

Cyan toner level low.

Black toner level low.

Refill CYAN toner hopper.

Refill BLACK toner hopper.

J5 - REPLACE COLOR DEV.

CARTRIDGE

J6 - REPLACE BLACK DEV.

CARTRIDGE

Color developer end of life.

Black developer end of life.

Replace

COLOR

Developer.

Replace

BLACK

Developer.

J7 - REPLACE TONER

COLLECTOR

J8 - REPLACE PRINT DRUM

Toner Collector full.

Print Drum end of life.

Replace Print

Drum.

J9 - REPLACE FUSER MODULE Fuser end of life.

Replace Toner

Collector.

Replace

Fuser/Oiler

Module.

JA - REPLACE FUSER OIL/PAD Fuser Oil low or pad worn.

Add Oil and

Replace Pad.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 9

W Series--Low Consumable/End-of-Use Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate that the Developer

Units, Fuser, or Photoreceptor (Print Drum) will soon need to be replaced.

These errors indicate ten percent of usage remaining when they are displayed. The printer will continue to print normally to allow the system administrator to schedule time for the printer to be serviced without impacting printing flow.

Window Message

W1 - COLOR DEV MOD

NEAR END OF USE

W2 - BLACK DEV MOD

NEAR END OF USE

W3 - PRINT DRUM

NEAR END OF USE

W4 - FUSER MODULE

NEAR END OF USE

W5 - FUSER/OILPAD NEAR

END OF USE

Probable Cause

Color Developer within

10% of end of life.

Black Developer within

10% of end of life.

Print Drum within 10% of end of life.

Fuser within 10% of end of life.

Fuser Oil within 10% of empty.

Corrective

Action

No action required.

Monitor status.

No action required.

Monitor status.

No action required.

Monitor

Status.

No action required.

Monitor status.

Replenish

Fuser Oil.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 10

T Series--Print Hardware Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate that the Fuser is not operating in the correct temperature range and may need to be replaced.

Window Message

T0 - POWER OFF/ON OR

RESEAT FUSER

T1 - POWER OFF/ON OR

RESEAT FUSER

T2 - POWER OFF/ON OR

RESEAT FUSER

Probable Cause Corrective

Action

Fuser thermistor error.

Turn printer

OFF. Allow time to cool.

Remove and reinstall Fuser.

Turn printer ON.

If problem persists, replace

Fuser Module.

Fuser under temperature.

Turn printer

OFF. Allow time to cool.

Remove and reinstall Fuser.

Turn printer ON.

If problem persists, replace

Fuser Module.

Fuser over temperature.

Turn printer

OFF. Allow time to cool.

Remove and reinstall Fuser.

Turn printer ON.

If problem persists, replace

Fuser Module.

E R R O R C O D E L I S T 11

U Series--Print Hardware Errors

These errors are generated by the print engine to indicate that problems have been sensed in any of a number of areas of the printer. If these errors occur, the printer will not continue to operate. Perform the corrective action and contact Xerox Customer Service if the error persists.

Window Message

U0 - ROM ERROR

POWER OFF/ON

U1 - RAM ERROR

POWER OFF/ON

U2 - NV-RAM ERROR

CALL SERVICE

U3 - COMM. FAULT

POWER OFF/ON

U4 - OPTICS FAULT

POWER OFF/ON

U5 - POLYGON FAULT

POWER OFF/ON

U6 - MOTOR FAULT

POWER OFF/ON

U7 - MOTOR FAULT

POWER OFF/ON

Probable Cause Corrective

Action

Engine ROM error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Engine RAM error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Engine NVRAM error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Engine/ESS communication failure.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Laser system error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Polygon motor error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Developer motor error.

Main motor error.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Turn printer OFF then ON. If problem persists, contact

Customer Service.

Chapter 12

System Maintenance

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 1

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 2

Chapter Twelve Contents

Introduction ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Purpose of this Chapter................................ ................................ ................................ .... 3

Objective................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 3

Requirements................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 3

Organization ................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 4

Formatting Your Hard Drive ................................ ................................ ................................ .. 5

Cleaning Procedures ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 6

Cleaning the outside of the Printer................................ ................................ .................... 6

Cleaning the Paper Tray(s)................................ ................................ ............................... 7

Maintenance Items ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 8

Printer Relocation................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 9

Simple Move ................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 9

Printer Upgrades (ESS and NIC) ................................ ................................ ........................ 13

Check the following before the upgrade:................................ ................................ ......... 14

Upgrade Methods................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 16

ESS Upgrade Process................................ ................................ ................................ .... 17

Determining a Successful Upgrade................................ ................................ ................. 18

After the Upgrade................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 18

Upgrade Procedures ................................ ................................ ................................ ...... 20

General Troubleshooting ................................ ................................ ................................ 30

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 3

Introduction

Purpose of this Chapter

The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with the proper information to perform various System Maintenance tasks on your DocuPrint printer.

Objective

The procedures described in this chapter will help maintain optimum print quality and minimize the downtime associated with use of your Xerox

DocuPrint Color Laser Printer.

Requirements

A basic understanding of the parts of the DocuPrint printer.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 4

Organization

The information contained in this chapter is organized by procedures. Each procedure should be followed in step-by-step order. The procedures include:

Formatting Your Hard Drive

Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning the outside of the printer

Cleaning the Paper Tray(s)

Maintenance Items

Printer Relocation

Site preparation

Prepare the printer

Move the printer

Printer and Network Card Upgrades

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 5

Formatting Your Hard Drive

Upon installation and prior to use, the optional Hard Drive requires formatting using the following procedure:

1.

Press On Line. Press Menu. <TOP MENU> message is displayed.

2.

Press Next until <SERVICE> appears. Press Enter.

3.

Press Next until <DISK SERVICES> is displayed. Press Enter.

4.

Press Next until <FORMAT DISK> is displayed. Press Enter.

5.

ARE YOU SURE? will be displayed. Press Enter.

6.

Press Next until <YES> is displayed. Press Enter.

7.

WAIT: FORMATTING HARD DISK is displayed while the hard drive is being formatted. The time will vary, depending on the size of the disk.

8.

Exit the DISK SERVICES menu and put the printer ON-LINE.

9.

Power the printer OFF and then ON. Verify hard disk information on the startup page.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 6

Cleaning Procedures

Perform the “Clean the outside of the printer” procedure:

If it becomes soiled from use.

If it has toner particles on the case.

Dry Ink (Toner) spills should be wiped up only with a dry cloth. Do not use a wet or damp cloth.

Cleaning the outside of the Printer

1.

Turn the printer’s power switch OFF but leave the power cord plugged into the wall receptacle to maintain a static ground.

2.

Take a clean, damp, lint-free cloth and wipe the case to remove toner smudges and dirt.

3.

Gently wipe the Control Panel buttons.

4.

Carefully clean the Display Panel with minimal pressure applied to the panel.

5.

Turn the printer’s power switch ON.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 7

Cleaning the Paper Tray(s)

Follow these steps to clean your Paper Tray(s):

1.

Grasp the Paper tray(s) by the handle and slide straight out of the printer.

2.

Remove any paper from the tray(s).

3.

Wipe the tray(s) with a damp cloth to remove toner or paper residue and dry thoroughly.

4.

Refill the tray(s) with paper or other media.

5.

Reinsert the tray(s) into the printer.

6.

Run a test print to check operation of the tray(s).

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 8

Maintenance Items

Maintenance items are parts that you need to replace when they become worn or damaged. These parts are designed to be replaced by the user.

Replacing these items when prompted by a Control Panel message or by your Printer Maintenance screen will help reduce your cost of ownership, keep your printer delivering top quality prints, and prolong you printer’s life.

We recommend that you use only Xerox-brand maintenance items that are available from your authorized dealer, or from Xerox. These products will provide the highest color print quality from your DocuPrint printer.

The use of non-Xerox maintenance items violates the warranty on your printer. If printer damage is found to be directly attributable to the use of non-Xerox products, you will be billed standard time and material charges to repair that damage.

Removal and installation instructions are packaged with each new item for your convenience.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 9

Printer Relocation

If you need to relocate your printer, read the following descriptions to decide which type of move you are performing.

Simple Move If you are moving your printer within the same building and there are no major obstacles such as stairs, a very rough floor surface use the Simple Move procedure provided in this document.

Complex Move If the printer will be transported in a motor vehicle to the new site it is recommended you use the Xerox Repack Kit to avoid damage to the printer during the move. You can order the Repack Kit from your dealer or Xerox.

Simple Move

PREPARE YOUR NEW LOCATION

Ensure that the new location meets the following requirements:

POWER REQUIREMENTS

110-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or 180-260 VAC, 50/60 Hz.

SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Minimum room size of 10 cubic meters (approximately 8 ft. x 8 ft. x 8 ft, or 242 cm x 242 cm x 242 cm).

Side and rear clearance of 10 inches (25 cm).

Front clearance of 24 inches (61 cm).

A firm, level surface for the printer.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 10

PREPARE THE PRINTER

Warning: After turning off the printer, allow the Fuser to cool to a safe temperature before handling.

1.

Ensure that no jobs are in process.

2.

Press the printer power switch to OFF.

3.

Disconnect the power cord.

4.

Disconnect the network interface cable or port cable.

5.

Open the front shell and remove and empty the Toner Collector. Retain this part for reinstallation.

6.

Open the top cover and remove the Fuser assembly. Pack this in a separate box and do not allow it to tip over as may result in an oil spill.

7.

Close the top cover.

8.

Close the front shell.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 11

INSTRUCTIONS FOR REMOVING LOWER FEEDER

ASSEMBLY (OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT)

When the lower feeder is installed onto the DocuPrint C55, it is automatically locked in place to prevent it from falling off when moved.

To remove the lower feeder assembly from the printer, the assembly needs to be unlocked from the printer frame.

To remove the lower feeder from the DocuPrint C55, you will need the following:

Flat-head screwdriver

3 people

PROCEDURE

1.

Position the printer so that the right-hand side is accessible.

2.

Locate the screw hole in center of the lower feeder assembly on the right-hand side of the printer.

3.

Have one person stand in front of the printer and one person stand in back of the printer.

4.

Have the third person insert the screwdriver into the screw hole and engage the slot on the screw.

5.

Turn the screwdriver a quarter turn in the clockwise direction until you hear a soft click. This click will unlock the lower feeder assembly from the printer assembly. DO NOT release screwdriver.

6.

While one person holds the screwdriver in the turned position so the lower feeder assembly is unlocked, the other two people should use the hold positions provided and lift the printer off the lower feeder assembly.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 12

MOVE THE PRINTER

CAUTION: Keep the printer level at all times during relocation. Tipping or tilting the printer may cause the dry ink (toner) and developer to shift in the cartridges, causing printing defects. Tipping may also cause waste dry ink (toner) to spill from the Waste Toner Collector.

1.

Ensure that two people lift and carry the printer. Be careful when lifting the printer as it weighs over 80 pounds (39 kg). Use a flat cart if possible to transport the printer to the new location.

2.

Place the printer on a firm, level surface. Arrange the printer to allow room for any panels to be opened, covers to be removed, and the

Manual Feed tray to be installed.

REINSTALL THE PRINTER

1.

Connect the power cable to the rear of the printer.

2.

Connect the network interface cable, the parallel cable or serial cable to the DocuPrint printer and the workstation.

3.

Open the front shell and replace the Toner Collector.

4.

Open the top cover and replace the Fuser assembly.

5.

Close the top cover.

6.

Close the front shell.

7.

Press the printer power switch to ON.

8.

Access the <PRINT> menu and print one of the settings pages as a test print.

CAUTION: Allow the printer to stabilize for several hours before making any adjustments.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 13

Printer Upgrades (ESS and NIC)

Both the C55 Printer (ESS) and the C55 NIC (Network Interface Card) are

FLASH ROM equipped. This means as software upgrades are available, the customer is able to update his printer and NIC card software without a service call.

Upgrades will be available on both the ftp site and the world wide web.

The ftp site is as follows:

ftp://spectrum.xerox.com/pub/network_cards/Color/ C55 ftp://spectrum.xerox.com/pub/drivers/Color/ Firmware/C55

Files from the ftp sites must be downloaded using the binary setting.

The world wide web location to retrieve files is

http://www.xerox.com/drivers

These files are compressed using PKZIP or BinHex/ StuffIt formats to avoid corruption during transfer. Self-extracting versions of the files exist for many platforms. For the other platforms you will need the appropriate decoding software.

When downloading a NIC file be sure to download the correct upgrade file for your Network card type (either Ethernet or Token Ring). The upgrade file for Ethernet is *en.* and for Token Ring is *tr.*.

There are a variety of ways to upgrade the printer and NIC software as outlined in this document.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 14

Check the following before the upgrade:

The printer must be in communication with the workstation directly, over the network, or have a media server installed (due to the size of the upgrade file a floppy disk may be used to perform the NIC upgrade only).

Be sure you have the proper upgrade file for the kind of upgrade you need to do. The ESS file will end in the extension “xfc”. The NIC card file will end with the extension “xfn”.

PRINT A SETTINGS PAGE

Verify the current version of the ESS and NIC software. The settings page will also give you a record of the primary server, IP address, and other critical parameters that have been set up for your printer. The settings page can be printed by doing the following:

1.

Press the Online button to take the printer off-line.

2.

Press Menu.

3.

Press Next until <PRINT> is displayed. Press Enter.

4.

Press Next until <SETTINGS> is displayed, then Enter.

5.

Press Next until <YES>is displayed, then Enter.

6.

At this point the settings page will print. Keep it for future reference.

7.

Return the printer to online by pressing the Online button.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 15

PRINT A “PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS” PAGE

Verify the current values of the Margin Adjustments. You may need to reset these after doing a Printer (ESS) Upgrade. This page can be printed by doing the following:

1.

Press the Online button to take the printer off-line.

2.

Press Menu.

3.

Press Next until <SERVICE> is displayed. Press Enter.

4.

Press Next until <TEST PATTERNS> are displayed, then Enter.

5.

Press Next until <DIAGNOSTICS> are displayed, then Enter.

6.

Press Next until <YES> is displayed, then Enter.

7.

At this point the diagnostics page will print. Keep it for future reference.

8.

Return the printer to online by pressing the Online button.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 16

Upgrade Methods

The C55 upgrade files can be sent to either a C55 PCL only printer or a

PCL/PS C55mp printer. See the following chart for a variety of ways to do a printer upgrade for a given operating system. The bold letter corresponds to the upgrade procedure detailed later in this document.

Operating

System

Win 3.x

Win 95

NT 3.51 & 4.0

OS/2

UNIX

Macintosh

CentreWare DP

A

A

A

N/A

N/A

LPR

***

***

B **

B **

B

Copy via the

Parallel

Port

C

C

C

C

N/A

Novell

Print

Queue

D

D

D

D

D

Macintosh

Printer Utility

E

E

E

E

N/A

** - Requires TCP/IP services to be installed from your operating system.

*** - Requires LPR capable software to be installed independently from the operating system.

N/A – Not Applicable

Internet

Services

F

F

F

F

N/A

F

Copy via

DLC Port

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

G

TFTP

H

NIC software can also be updated via the optional media server. If your printer has a media server option (Upgrade procedure H), the NIC flash file can be placed on a DOS formatted floppy and downloaded through the media server. This method is only valid for the network card flash file as the ESS flash file is too large to fit onto a single floppy diskette.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 17

ESS Upgrade Process

When doing an upgrade the printer’s Control Panel will go through several stages.

As the printer starts to receive the file it will cycle through a “Processing”,

“Waiting” messages.

After the file has been fully received the Control Panel will proceed to

“Upgrading, Please Wait…” and the upgrade process will begin.

After a few more minutes the Control Panel will now read “Initializing” , followed by “Printing”. At this point a start up sheet will be printing.

The total process should take no more than 10 minutes over a network connection, and no more that 20 minutes over the parallel port.

NOTE: It is important to not interrupt any part of the process after it has been initiated. DO NOT TURN OFF THE PRINTER IN THE MIDDLE

OF AN UPGRADE. Doing so may require the printer to be serviced by a

Xerox authorized technician.

If you are concerned the process is taking too long, consult the General

Troubleshooting section, or call your Xerox Customer Support Center.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 18

Determining a Successful Upgrade

ESS

There will be an indication if your upgrade is successful. For an ESS

(Printer) upgrade you will receive a new start up page. The “Software

Version” on the start up page should reflect the software level of the upgrade.

NIC

For the NIC upgrade you will receive a confirmation page if your upgrade is successful. On the confirmation page will be the new software version for the NIC. If the NIC upgrade fails for any reason you will receive an error page explaining what failed (for example, if you send an Ethernet flash to a Token Ring NIC, the error tells you it is the wrong firmware/card combination).

After the Upgrade

After a successful Printer (ESS) upgrade all printer features will be set to the factory defaults. You will need to reset key settings in the printer.

Some of these parameters include settings that allow you to print to the printer. If printing over a network, these parameters must be reset before you will be able to print. You will need the previously printed Settings page and Diagnostics page.

After a successful NIC upgrade, power off and on the printer. Print a Print

Settings page and make sure the network settings are as you expect.

Resetting parameters should not be necessary for a NIC only upgrade.

After a successful ESS upgrade, using the directions in the section labeled

Check the following before the Upgrade, print out a new Print Settings

Page and Diagnostics page. Compare the original settings page with the new one. Items that may be different include: Serial Number, Appletalk

Name, Timeout settings, Novell Settings (Primary Server, Print Server

Name, Tree and Context), TCP/IP Settings (IP Address, Subnet Mask,

Default Gateway). Identify the items that are different between the 2 settings pages. Use CentreWare DP or the Control Panel (in some cases both) to restore settings. If you require assistance please contact your

Xerox Customer Support Center.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 19

Now compare the Printer Diagnostics pages. Look at section labeled

Adjustments. If the Top Margin and Left Margin numbers do not match between the 2 Diagnostic pages they will need to be reset. To do this use the following procedure:

1.

Press the Online button to take the printer off-line.

2.

Press Menu.

3.

Press Next until <SERVICE> is displayed. Press Enter.

4.

Press Next until <ADJUSTMENTS> are displayed, then Enter.

5.

Press Next until <LEFTMARGIN> is displayed, then Enter.

6.

Using the Next and Previous buttons, scroll to the desired margin adjustment. Select Enter.

7.

<TOPMARGIN> should now read on the Control Panel. Press

[Enter].

8.

Using the Next and Previous buttons, scroll to the desired margin adjustment. Select Enter.

9.

Return the printer to online by selecting the Online button.

Finally, consult the Density Rate Setpoints section on the Printer

Diagnostics pages. If the 2 sections are different between the original and new pages then a Color Balance procedure should be performed. Consult the DocuPrint C55 User Guide or Technical Information Guide for details.

Note that even after performing a color balance procedure the Density Rate

Setpoints will not necessarily match the set points on the original Printer

Diagnostics page.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 20

Upgrade Procedures

PROCEDURE A

UPGRADE FROM CENTREWARE DP

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun DO NOT Power off your

Printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Start the CentreWare DP software from your workstation. Select a printer from the Printers List.

3.

At the CentreWare DP main screen select the Tools menu.

4.

From the Tools menu select the Upgrade Printer item.

5.

Select either the Network or Printer button.

6.

Enter the path of the upgrade file and click OK.

7.

CentreWare DP will send the upgrade file to the printer. The upgrade should take less than 10 minutes to perform.

8.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade. For problems consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

PROCEDURE B

LPR UPGRADE PROCEDURE

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 21

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun do not power off your printer!

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Send the upgrade file to the printer. Use the format based on your client operating system:

Windows NT (3.51 & 4.)

lpr -P ps -S <ipaddress> <filename>[RETURN]

OS/2

lpr -p ps -s <ipaddress> <filename>[RETURN]

UNIX (use lp or lpr as appropriate)

lpr <switches><queue><filename> [RETURN] lp <switches><queue><filename> [RETURN]

Where:

<ipaddress> = the TCP/IP address the printer has been assigned

<filename> = the path and name of the upgrade file

<queue> = the native queue to which the printer is assigned

<switches> = use switches as appropriate to your UNIX environment

3.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade.

IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS :

Try to ping the printer to make sure it is a valid ip address

In addition consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 22

PROCEDURE C

COPY VIA THE PARALLEL PORT

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun, do not power off your printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

If you have a C55 mp printer, or a printer with the PostScript option the parallel port on the printer must be in Auto Select mode. Check the settings page previously printed. In the Parallel Settings section the

Mode should be set to Auto Select. If it is not you will need to set this through the printer’s Control Panel or CentreWare DP. To make the setting through the Control Panel do the following: a) Take the printer off-line by pressing the Online button.

b) Press Menu.

c) Press Next until <COMMUNICATIONS> is displayed. Press

Enter.

d) Press Next until <PARALLEL> is displayed. Press Enter.

e) Press Next until <MODE> is displayed. Press Enter.

f) Press Next until <AUTOSELECT> is displayed. Press Enter.

g) Return the printer to online by pressing the Online button.

3.

Send the upgrade file to the printer. An OS/2 user should open a command prompt, a Windows(95/NT/3.1x) user should run from DOS or run a DOS session. It is recommended to exit Windows and run from DOS whenever possible. This will result in a shorter time for the upgrade process to take place.

4.

The format for the copy command is as follows:

copy <filename> <port>[RETURN]

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 23

Where:

<port> = the parallel port to which the printer is connected

(LPT1:,LPT2:, etc.)

<filename> = the path and name of the upgrade file

Ex: copy 3_3_4.xfc LPT1

5.

The file will be sent to the printer. To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled Determining a Successful Upgrade.

If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade.

IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS:

Make sure you are using a IEEE P1284 compliant cable such as the one shipped with the C55 printer.

Make sure the printer’s parallel port Mode is set to AutoSelect for C55 mp printers, or printers with the PostScript option.

If running a DOS window from Windows 95 make sure that one of your printers through Settings/Printers is mapped directly to

LPT 1(not re-directed to a network queue). Also check the port settings by selecting the Port Settings.. button on the Details tab dialog. Make sure the selection Spool MS-DOS Print Jobs is selected. After making these settings try powering off an on your

PC if still having problems.

(Windows Users) If experiencing time-outs on the host PC

("Problem detected on parallel port, Abort,Retry,Fail") then you need to set the port to an infinite time-out against busy on the printer. From the command line or as an entry in autoexec.bat

type the following command:

mode lpt1:,,b (two commas following the colon)

The "b" option sets the port for infinite time-out. After setting the port to an infinite time-out, try using the copy command again. If the command prompt does not appear within 15 minutes a ctrl-break can be used to abort the copy command without rebooting your computer.

Windows 3.11 users should turn off Print Manager.

In addition consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting

PROCEDURE D

INSERT INTO NOVELL QUEUE

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 24

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun do not Power off your

Printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Start PCONSOLE

3.

Select Print Queue Information the press [RETURN]

4.

Select the print queue to send the job to, then press [RETURN]

5.

Select Current Print Job Entries then press [RETURN]

6.

Press the [INSERT] key. Type in the path/filename and press

[RETURN].

7.

Choose configuration and then press [RETURN].

8.

Press the [ESC] key. Select Yes then press [RETURN].

9.

The upgrade file will be sent to the printer. The upgrade should take less than 10 minutes to perform.

10.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade.

IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS :

If the printer never goes to “Processing” check the status of the job in the queue. If the job is in the queue and Active, but not being sent to the printer, power the printer off and on. See if the job is then sent to the printer.

In addition consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 25

PROCEDURE E

MACINTOSH – XEROX PRINTER UTILITY

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun DO NOT Power off your

Printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Launch the Xerox Printer Utility

3.

Select the C55 printer to upgrade in PostScript Printers list.

4.

Select Send.

5.

Locate the upgrade file.

6.

Select Open to send the upgrade file to the printer.

7.

The Xerox Printer Utility will send the upgrade file to the printer. The upgrade should take less than 10 minutes.

8.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade. For problems consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 26

PROCEDURE F

UPGRADE PROCEDURE VIA INTERNET SERVICES

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun, do not power off your printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled. Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Launch your web browser and connect to the printer URL (typically

http://ipaddress)

3.

Select the Print page to get to the File Download dialog.

4.

In the File: box enter the path and name of the upgrade file, or select the Browse.. button to select the upgrade file.

5.

Select the Start button.

6.

The upgrade file will be sent to the printer. The upgrade should take less than 10 minutes to perform.

7.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade.

IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS :

If having problems with time-outs when sending the file using a proxy server try turning off the proxy server and sending the file again.

Alternatively, the printer IP address can be entered individually as an address for which a proxy should not be used.

Check your browser version to be sure your are using the correct version. The upgrade procedure requires Netscape 3.0 or later or

Internet Explorer 4.0 or later

Try to ping the printer to make sure it is a valid ip address

In addition consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 27

PROCEDURE G

COPY UPGRADE PROCEDURE VIA DLC

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun, do not power off your printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Send the upgrade file using the copy command.

3.

The format for the copy command is as follows:

4.

Copy <filename> \\<machinename>\<resourcename> [RETURN]

Where:

<machinename> = server UNC name

<resourcename> = shared printer resource on the server

<filename> = the path and name of the upgrade file

5.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade. For problems consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 28

PROCEDURE H

UPGRADE VIA TFTP

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun, do not power off your printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

tftp to <printername> OR <printerIPaddress>

3.

Change mode to binary

4.

Put <filename>

Where:

< printername> = as referenced in the system’s hosts file

< printerIPaddress> = the TCP/IP address the printer has been assigned

<filename> = the path and name of the upgrade file

5.

The file will be sent to the printer. To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled Determining a Successful Upgrade.

If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade. For problems consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 29

PROCEDURE I

TO INSTALL VIA THE MEDIA SERVER

(VALID FOR NIC UPGRADE ONLY):

Warning: Once the upgrade process has begun, do not power off your printer !

1.

Print a Printer Settings page. Print a Printer Diagnostics page. Keep these pages for future reference. For directions on doing this reference the section labeled. Check the following before the Upgrade.

2.

Insert the DOS format floppy disk containing the upgrade file into the

Media Server.

3.

Press the Media Server button on the printer’s Control Panel.

4.

<Select File> is displayed. Press Enter.

5.

The system will display <READING DISK>

6.

Press Next until the upgrade’s file name is displayed.

7.

Press Enter.

8.

The Control Panel will display <Reading Disk> while the printer downloads the file to the NIC. It will take less than ten minutes to upgrade the NIC. Print jobs will not be accepted from the network during this time.

9.

To see if your upgrade was successful see the section labeled

Determining a Successful Upgrade. If successful follow the instructions in After the Upgrade. For problems consult the section labeled General Troubleshooting.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 30

General Troubleshooting

Some of the individual printer upgrade methods will have their own trouble shooting sections. This section is to address general problems.

ESS UPGRADE:

If the ESS upgrade has failed you will not receive an error page. Check the following and try the upgrade again:

1.

Make sure you are using the correct upgrade file for your ESS (printer)

It should be a *.xfc file, not an *.xfn file

2.

Check your method of connectivity to your printer. Can you successfully send a job over your chosen method of connectivity? For parallel port users- are you using a IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable?

3.

If the flash software was downloaded from an ftp site, make sure it was downloaded in binary format, not ASCII. To change to binary format, type binary at any ftp prompt. If you are using an ftp software package such as Chameleon ftp, you can select binary from within the software.

4.

Consult your upgrade procedure to see if there is a “If you have problems” section in your chosen upgrade procedure

5.

If the printer never goes to “Processing” and stays “Online” check your method of printer connection. Try powering off and on. If sending via a NetWare queue check the status of the job in the queue. Powering off and on the printer may cause the job to get to the printer.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 31

6.

Power off and on. Send the file again using the same method.

7.

Power off and on. Send the file using an alternative method as indicated in the chart.

8.

If the printer appears to be hung in “Processing” after sending the upgrade file (with the “Processing” message on the Control Panel for at least 15 minutes) either contact your Xerox Customer Support Center for assistance, or power off and on the printer. If the printer powers up properly try sending the upgrade file again. If the printer does not power up properly contact your support center for assistance.

9.

If the printer appears to be hung in “Upgrading, Please Wait… ”, (with the “Upgrading, Please Wait” message on the Control Panel for at least

10 minutes) contact your Xerox Customer Support Center for assistance.

10.

If all attempts to upgrade the ESS have failed, note the Control Panel message of the printer when the upgrade fails and contact your support center for assistance.

11.

If a printer upgrade was attempted and the printer will not power up properly contact your support center for assistance.

S Y S T E M M A I N T E N A N C E 32

NIC UPGRADE:

If the NIC upgrade is unsuccessful, an error page will print. Check the following and send the upgrade file again:

1.

Make sure you are using the correct upgrade file for your NIC card

(token ring/ Ethernet). If you download the incorrect file for your NIC card you will receive an error stating Wrong type firmware for NIC.

*EN.xfn is for the upgrade of Ethernet cards.

*TR.xfn is for the upgrade of Token Ring cards.

2.

If you are flashing a Token Ring card, first insert it into the ring.

3.

If the flash software was downloaded from an ftp site, make sure it was downloaded in binary format, not ASCII. To change to binary format, type binary at any ftp prompt. If you are using an ftp software package such as Chameleon ftp, you can select binary from within the software.

4.

Power the printer off and on.

5.

If you still cannot upgrade the NIC, factory reset the printer and turn the printer off and on, and try the upgrade again. Make sure you have a settings page printed before you do a factory reset. To do a factory reset do the following: a) Take the printer off line by pressing the Online button.

b) Press Menu.

c) Press Next until <SETUP> is displayed. Press Enter.

d) Press Next until <FACTORY RESET> is displayed. Press Enter.

e) Press Next until <YES> is displayed. Press Enter.

f) Return the printer to online by pressing the Online button.

6.

If all of these attempts fail to upgrade the NIC card, contact your support center for assistance.

If all upgrade attempts have failed, try the following:

1.

Factory reset the printer.

2.

Power the printer off and on.

3.

Send the upgrade file again.

Chapter 13

Printer Specifications

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 1

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 2

Chapter Thirteen Contents

Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

Performance Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

Print Feature Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

Connectivity Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6

Media Specifications -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

Physical Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

Electrical-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10

Supplies Storage Specifications-----------------------------------------------------------------------------11

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 3

Introduction

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with a detailed look at the physical and operating specifications of the DocuPrint printer.

This information is meant to give a quick physical and performance reference for your DocuPrint printer.

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 4

Performance Specifications

Print Speed

Four-color prints on media size 8.5 x 11, A4, and 8.5 x 14 at print speeds up to 3 pages per minute.

Black-only pages print at speeds up to 12 pages per minute.

Transparencies 8.5 x 11 or A4 print at 1.9 pages per minute.

Maximum print volume is approximately 15,000 prints/month.

Warm-up time is a maximum of 180 seconds from a cold start and 60 seconds for a power off power on.

Resolutions

Two resolutions are available for black & white and color printing.

Black & White

Color

600 x 600 dpi 600 x 300 x 4 dpi

600 x 600 x 1 dpi 600 x 300 x 4 dpi

Controller

AMD 29040 CF RISC processor, operating at 50MHz.

Memory Capacity

DocuPrint C55 - 24 MB DRAM is standard, upgradable to 64 MB

DRAM

Page Description Languages supported

PCL 5C standard on C55 and C55mp

Adobe PostScript Level 2 standard on C55mp; optional on C55

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 5

Print Feature Specifications

Resident Typefaces

35 Intellifonts (PCL 5C printers)

10 TrueType (PCL 5C printers)

Latin II and Cyrillic extensions

35 Adobe Type 1 fonts (with PostScript installed)

All typefaces have multilingual character sets.

Software Driver Compatibility

Windows 95

Windows 3.1

Windows For Workgroups 3.11

Windows NT 3.51, 4.0

OS/2

Macintosh (system 7.0 and higher)

UNIX (SunOS and Solaris, HPUX, Silicon Graphics AIX)

Supports Apple ColorSync, Windows 95 ICM, and the PANTONE

Matching System.

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 6

Connectivity Specifications

Available Interfaces

The standard parallel port provides compatibility with PC, UNIX, and OS/2 operating systems. An optional Serial/LocalTalk interface card provides compatibility with Macintosh.

Two network cards are available for connection to Ethernet or Token Ring networks.

Standard Interface

Centronics Parallel P1284 ECP Mode capable, Windows 95 Plug and

Play Standard

Optional Interfaces

Ethernet: Netware, EtherTalk, TCP/IP, DLC/LLC, and SNMP

Protocols

Token Ring: Netware, TokenTalk, TCP/IP, DLC/LLC, and SNMP

Protocols

Serial /LocalTalk Port Option Card provides connection to standard RS-

232C (9 pin) serial port as well as LocalTalk (Apple)

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 7

Media Specifications

Media Sizes Supported

Letter

Legal

Executive

A4

A5

B5

Invoice

SP. Folio

Folio

8 x 10

Paper Weights Supported

16 - 24 lbs. / 60 - 90 gsm

Media Types Supported

Laser Quality

Transparencies

Standard office plain paper

Labels (manual feed in black toner only)

Envelopes (manual feed in black toner only)

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 8

Paper/Transparency Input Capacity

UNIVERSAL TRAY

Holds up to 250 sheets of plain paper.

Holds up to 75 transparencies.

MANUAL BYPASS TRAY

Standard single sheet, plain paper or transparencies, envelopes, labels

OPTIONAL LOWER PAPER FEEDER

Holds an additional 250 sheets of paper or 75 transparencies. Enables

Auto Tray Switching feature.

Output Tray Capacity

150 sheets of plain paper

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 9

Physical Specifications

Dimensions

Width: 18.5 inches (470 mm)

Depth: 16.5 inches (419 mm)

Height: 16.5 inches (419 mm)

Weight

Base Printer weighs 89 pounds (40Kg.)

Operating Environment

Operating temperature is from 50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C)

Operating humidity is 15% to 85% RH

Operating noise level is 54 dBA maximum

Standby noise level is 47 dBA maximum

Storage Environment

Storage temperature is from 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C)

Storage humidity is 10% to 90% RH

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 10

Electrical

Power requirements: 110-130 VAC, 50/60Hz or 220-260 VAC,

50/60 Hz.

Power consumption is 300W average/1000W maximum.

Maximum power consumption in the Low Power state is less than 45 watts.

Energy Star compliant

P R I N T E R S P E C I F I C A T I O N S 11

Supplies Storage Specifications

To avoid printer downtime, keep a supply of Consumables and Maintenance items on hand.

Consumable Items Available From

Cyan Toner

Magenta Toner

Yellow Toner

Black Toner

Toner Collector

Fuser Oil Bottle

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Xerox Dealer or Distributor

Supplies Storage Environment

Temperature 14

°

to 104

°

F (-10

°

to 40

°

C)

Humidity 10% to 90% relative humidity

Storage Conditions Keep unopened boxes in a cool, dry, wellventilated, dark place. Keep away from direct sunlight, corrosive gases, solvents, and any liquids.

Optional Hardware

2

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Ethernet/Token Ring Card Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation de la carte Ethernet/Token Ring

Einbauanleitungen - Ethernet/TokenRing-Karte

Istruzioni per l’installazione della scheda Ethernet/Token Ring

Instrucciones de instalación de la tarjeta Ethernet/Token Ring

Instruções para instalação da placa Ethernet/Token Ring

SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES

DISPOSITIFS ELECTRONIQUES SENSIBLES

EMPFINDLICHE ELEKTRONIK

DISPOSITIVI ELETTRONICI SENSIBILI

DISPOSITIVOS ELECTRÓNICOS SENSIBLES

DISPOSITIVOS ELETRÔNICOS SENSÍVEIS

• Turn the printer off.

⊗ Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

♣ Drucker ausschalten.

∇ Spegnere la stampante.

♠ Apague la impresora.

◊ Desligue a impressora.

Remove and discard the screw and cover plate, located on the panel at the back, right corner of the printer, as shown.

Retirez la vis et la plaque du panneau, situées dans la partie arrière droite de l’imprimante, comme le montre la figure.

Schraube und Verkleidung hinten rechts am Drucker abschrauben und wegwerfen (siehe Abbildung).

Rimuovere ed eliminare la vite e la piastra del coperchio, situate in basso a destra sulla parte posteriore della stampante, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Retire y descarte el tornillo y la placa de cubierta, situada en la parte posterior de la esquina derecha de la impresora, tal como se muestra.

Retire e descarte o parafuso e a chapa protetora, localizados no painel no canto superior traseiro da impressora, conforme ilustrado.

Fit the card into the tracks, with the thumb screw on the right hand side, and slide it firmly into place. Use light thumb pressure to seat the card.

Glissez avec fermeté la carte dans ses supports, la molette à droite, de manière

à la mettre en place correctement. Appuyez légèrement avec le pouce pour bien installer la carte.

Mit der Rändelschraube auf der rechten Seite die Karte in die Führungen einschieben, bis sie richtig sitzt, dabei leichten Druck auf Karte ausüben.

Inserire la scheda nelle guide, con la vite a testa piatta a destra, e fissarla saldamente. Esercitare una leggere pressione con il pollice per alloggiare propriamente la scheda.

Introduzca la tarjeta en los rieles, con el tornillo colocado hacia el lado derecho, y deslícela firmemente en su lugar. Presione ligeramente con el dedo pulgar para posicionar la tarjeta.

Ajuste o cartão nos trilhos, com o parafuso posicionado no lado direito, e deslize-o para colocá-lo no lugar. Para posicionar o cartão, faça uma pressão leve com os polegares.

4

Tighten the thumb screw on the card.

Resserrez la vis de la carte.

Karte mit der Ründelschraube festschrauben.

Avvitare la vite a testa piatta sulla scheda.

Apriete el tornillo de ajuste manual en la tarjeta.

Aperte com os dedos o parafuso no cartão.

701P93165

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Lower Feeder Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation du module d'Alimentation inférieure

Einbauanleitungen - Untere Zufuhr

Istruzioni per l’installazione dell’alimentatore inferiore

Instrucciones de instalación del alimentador inferior

Instruções para instalação do alimentador inferior

Turn the printer off.

Remove the power cord.

Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation.

Drucker ausschalten.

Netzkabel abziehen.

Spegnere la stampante.

Rimuovere il cavo di alimentazione.

Apague la impresora.

Retire el cable de potencia.

Desligue a impressora.

Retire o cabo de alimentação.

2

Remove (break off) the plastic cover on the back, bottom left corner as shown.

Enlevez le capot plastique arrière situé dans le coin inférieur gauche, comme le montre la figure.

Kunststoffabdeckung an der Rückseite unten links (siehe Abbildung) entfernen

(herausbrechen).

Rimuovere il coperchio di plastica posto nell’angolo posteriore sinistro in basso, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Elimine la cubierta plástica de la parte posterior, en la esquina inferior izquierda, tal como se muestra.

Retire (rompa) a tampa plástica no canto esquerdo inferior traseiro, conforme ilustrado.

13

Locate the alignment pins on the Lower Feeder. These must be aligned with the corresponding holes on the bottom of the printer.

Repérez les broches d’alignement du magasin d’alimentation inférieur. Celles-ci doivent être en face des trous situés sous l’imprimante.

Ausrichtungsstifte an der unteren Papiestufuler suchen. Diese müssen mit den entsprechenden Bohrungen an der Unterseite des Druckers ausgerichtet werden.

Individuare i piedini di allineamento dell’alimentatore inferiore. Questi devono essere allineati ai fori corrispondenti sulla parte inferiore della stampante.

Ubique patillas alineadas en el Alimentador inferior. Estas deben alinearse con los correspondientes orificios de la parte inferior de la impresora.

Localize os pinos de alinhamento no Alimentador Inferior. Eles devem ser alinhados com os orifícios na parte inferior da impressora.

4

Warning! The printer weighs approx. 84 lbs (38 kg). Two people should lift the printer.

Holding the printer by the hand holds on the sides, lower it in place on top of the

Lower Feeder, making sure to fit the pins in place.

Avertissement ! L’imprimante pèse environ 38 kg. Faites-vous aider pour la soulever.

En maintenant l’imprimante par ses poignées latérales, faites-la descendre sur le magasin d’alimentation inférieur, en vous assurant que les broches se mettent bien en place.

Warnung! Der Drucker wiegt ca. 38 kg. Deshalb sollte der Drucker von zwei

Personen angehoben werden.

Drucker an den seitlichen Griffen greifen und auf die untere Papierzuführ aufsetzen. Die stifle müssen dabei korrekt eingesteckt werden.

Avvertenza! La stampante pesa approssimativamente 38 kg, per questo deve essere sollevata da due persone.

Tenendo la stampante per i manici posti sui lati, poggiarla sulla parte superiore dell’alimentatore inferiore, assicurandosi di aver inserito correttamente i piedini.

¡Atención! La impresora pesa aproximadamente 84 lbs (38 kg). Dos personas deben levantar la impresora.

Sosteniendo la impresora por los costados, bájela encima del Alimentador inferior, asegurándose de que las patillas se ajusten en su posición.

Aviso! A impressora pesa aprox. 38 kg. Recomenda-se que duas pessoas levantem a impressora.

Segurando a impressora pelas alças laterais, abaixe-a para colocá-la sobre o

Alimentador Inferior, verificando para que os pinos estejam no lugar.

5

Attach the power cord on the Lower Feeder to the printer.

Fixez le cordon d’alimentation du magasin d’alimentation inférieur à l’imprimante.

Das Netzkabel der unteren Papierzuführ in den Drucker einstecken.

Collegare il cavo di alimentazione dell’alimentatore inferiore alla stampante.

Conecte el cable de potencia del Alimentador inferior a la impresora.

Conecte o cabo de alimentação do Alimentador Inferior na impressora.

Transparencies in Lower Feeder

Note:

Please run 50 sheets of plain paper before using transparencies for the first time in your new Lower Feeder. This will reduce the chance of experiencing a transparency jam.

Cautions:

The tray capacity for transparencies is

75 sheets

. Loading more that 75 sheet increases the chance of experiencing a jam.

Transparents dans le départ papier inférieur

Remarque:

Veuillez faire passer dans la machine 50 feuilles de papier ordinaire avant d’utiliser des transparents pour la première fois dans le nouveau départ papier inférieur afin de diminuer les risques d’incident papier.

Mise en garde :

La capacité du magasin pour transparents est de

75 feuilles

. Si ce chiffre est dépassé, les risques d’incident papier augmentent.

Klarsichtfolien im unteren Zufuhrbehälter

HInweis:

Vor der ersten Verwendung von Klarsichtfolien im unteren Zufuhrbehälter sollten 50 Blatt Normalpapier zugeführt werden.

Dadurch wird das Risiko eines Folienstaus reduziert.

Vorsicht:

Die Behälterkapazität für Folien beträgt

75 Blatt

. Wenn mehr als 75 Blatt eingelegt werden, erhöht sich das Risiko eines

Folienstaus.

Trasparenti nell’alimentatore inferiore

Nota:

Prima di utilizzare per la prima volta i trasparenti nel nuovo Alimentatore inferiore, fare una tiratura su 50 fogli di carta comune.

Questo ridurrà le possibilità di inceppamenti dei trasparenti.

Attenzione:

La capacità del vassoio per trasparenti è di

75 fogli

. Se si caricano più di 75 fogli, si aumenta la possibilità di inceppamenti.

Transparências no Alimentador Inferior

Nota:

Execute 50 folhas de papel comum antes de usar transparências pela primeira vez no seu Alimentador Inferior. Isto reduzirá a possibilidade de ocorrência de um atolamento de transparência.

Cuidado:

A capacidade da bandeja para transparências é de

75 folhas

. O abastecimento de mais de 75 folhas aumentará a possibilidade de ocorrência de um atolamento.

Transparencias en el alimentador inferior

Nota:

Antes de usar transparencias por primera vez en su nuevo alimentador inferior, realice una tirada de 50 hojas de papel normal.

Esto reducirá la posibilidad de que las transparencias se atasquen.

Precauciones:

La capacidad de la bandeja para transparencias es

75 hojas

. Si se sobrepasa esta cantidad habrá más posibilidades de que ocurra un atasco.

701P93163

2

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Hard Drive Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation du lecteur de disque dur

Einbauanleitungen - Festplatte

Istruzioni per l’installazione del disco rigido

Instrucciones de instalación del disco duro

Instruções para instalação do disco rígido

SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES

DISPOSITIFS ELECTRONIQUES SENSIBLES

EMPFINDLICHE ELEKTRONIK

DISPOSITIVI ELETTRONICI SENSIBILI

DISPOSITIVOS ELECTRÓNICOS SENSIBLES

DISPOSITIVOS ELETRÔNICOS SENSÍVEIS

Turn the printer off.

Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

Drucker ausschalten.

Spegnere la stampante.

Apague la impresora.

Desligue a impressora.

Release the latches and open the front and back panels.

Débloquez les loquets et ouvrez les panneaux avant et arrière.

Verriegelung lösen und die Vorder- und Rückverkleidung öffnen.

Liberare le chiusure ed aprire i pannelli frontale e laterale.

Libere los seguros y abra los paneles delantero y posterior.

Solte as travas e abra o painel dianteiro e o traseiro.

3

4

5

6

Loosen the two screws from the left side cover as shown.

Desserez les deux vis du capot latéral gauche, comme le montre la figure.

Die beiden Schrauben von der linken Seitenverkleidung lösen (siehe

Abbildung).

Allentare le due viti del coperchio laterale sinistro, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Afloje los dos tornillos de la cubierta del costado izquierdo, tal como se muestra.

Solte os dois parafusos da tampa do lado esquerdo, conforme ilustrado.

Loosen the screw from the back of the left side cover, as shown.

Desserez la vis située sur la partie arrière du capot latéral gauche, comme le montre la figure.

Die Schraube von der Rückseite der linken Seitenverkleidung lösen (siehe

Abbildung).

Allentare la vite della parte posteriore del coperchio laterale sinistro, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Afloje el tornillo de la parte posterior de la cubierta del costado izquierdo, tal como se muestra.

Solte o parafuso da parte posterior da tampa no lado esquerdo, conforme ilustrado.

Lift the cover out and up to remove it.

Enlevez le capot en le soulevant.

Verkleidung anheben und abnehmen.

Sollevare il coperchio per rimuoverlo.

Levante la cubierta hacia afuera y arriba para retirarla.

Levante e retire a tampa.

Loosen the 5 screws from the inner cover, as shown.

Desserez les 5 vis du capot interne, comme le montre la figure.

Die fünf Schrauben von der inneren Abdeckung lösen (siehe Abbildung).

Allentare le 5 viti del coperchio interno, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Afloje los 5 tornillos de la cubierta interior, tal como se muestra.

Solte os 5 parafusos da tampa interna, conforme ilustrado.

7

8

9

Remove the inner cover.

Retirez le capot interne.

Innere Abdeckung abnehmen.

Rimuovere il coperchio interno.

Retire la cubierta interior.

Retire a tampa interna.

Insert the Hard Drive as shown. Fit the hooked tabs on the bottom of the unit into the cutouts as shown.

Tighten the screw in the bracket.

Mettez en place le disque dur, comme le montre la figure. Enclenchez les pattes situées sous l’unité dans les encoches, comme le montre la figure.

Resserrez la vis du support.

Festplattenlaufwerk einbauen (siehe Abbildung). Gebogene Halterungen an der

Unterseite in die Öffnungen einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Schraube in der Halterung festziehen.

Inserire il disco rigido, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Inserire nelle fessure le linguette ricurve della parte inferiore dell’unità, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Avvitare la vite nel supporto.

Inserte el Disco duro, tal como se muestra. Introduzca las lengüetas en forma de gancho dentro de las perforaciones de la parte inferior de la unidad, tal como se muestra.

Apriete el tornillo en el soporte.

Insira o disco rígido, conforme ilustrado. Encaixe as guias da parte inferior da unidade nos entalhes, conforme ilustrado.

Aperte o parafuso no suporte.

Attach the connector as shown.

Fixez le connecteur, comme le montre la figure.

Stecker einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Collegare il connettore, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Una el conector, tal como se muestra.

Coloque o conector, conforme ilustrado.

10

With the Media Server

Avec Media Serveur

Mit Medienserver

Con il Media server

Con el servidor de medios

Com o Media Server

If you do not have a Media Server installed, skip to Step 13.

Si vous n’avez pas installé de Media Serveur, passez à l’étape 13.

Wenn kein Medienserver installiert ist, mit Schritt 13 fortfahren.

Se non è installato un media server, passare al punto 13.

Si no tiene un Servidor de medios instalado, pase al paso 13.

Caso um Media Server não esteja instalado, siga para o passo 13.

Unclip the small Media Server connector as shown.

Retirez le petit connecteur du Media Serveur, comme le montre la figure.

Medienserver-Stecker herausziehen (siehe Abbildung).

Sganciare il connettore piccolo del media server, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Retire el conector pequeño del Servidor de medios, tal como se muestra.

Desconecte o pequeno conector do Media Server, conforme ilustrado.

11

Insert the small board as shown.

Mettez en place la petite carte, comme le montre la figure.

Kleine Karte einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Inserire la scheda piccola, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Inserte la tarjeta pequeña, tal como se muestra.

Insira a placa pequena, conforme ilustrado.

12

• Attach the Media Server connector to the small board as shown.

• Go to Step 14.

⊗ Fixez le connecteur du serveur de support à la petite carte, comme le montre la figure.

⊗ Passez à l’étape 14.

♣ Medienserver-Stecker an der kleinen karte einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

♣ Mit Schritt 14 fortfahren.

∇ Collegare il connettore del media server alla scheda piccola, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

∇ Passare alla fase 14.

♠ Una el conector del Servidor de medios a la tarjeta pequeña, tal como se muestra.

♠ Pase al paso 14.

◊ Coloque o conector do Media Server na placa pequena, conforme ilustrado.

◊ Siga para o passo 14.

13

Without the Media Server

Sans Media Serveur

Ohne Medienserver

Senza il Media server

Sin el servidor de medios

Sem o Media Server

Insert the small board as shown.

Mettez en place la petite carte, comme le montre la figure.

Kleine Karte einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Inserire la scheda piccola, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Inserte la tarjeta pequeña, tal como se muestra.

Insira a placa pequena, conforme ilustrado.

14

Replace the inner cover. Fit the tabs on the bottom of the cover in place as shown. Tighten the 5 screws.

Remettez en place le capot interne. Fixez les pattes situées sous le capot, comme le montre la figure. Revissez les 5 vis.

Innere Abdeckung wieder anbringen. Dabei die Vorsprüngen an der Unterseite der Abdeckung exakt ausrichten (siehe Abbildung). Die fünf Schrauben anziehen.

Rimettere a posto il coperchio interno. Inserire le linguette della parte inferiore del coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Avvitare le 5 viti.

Reinstale la cubierta interior. Introduzca las lengüetas de la parte inferior de la cubierta en su lugar, tal como se muestra. Apriete los 5 tornillos.

Recoloque a tampa interna. Posicione no lugar as guias na parte inferior da tampa, conforme ilustrado. Aperte os 5 parafusos.

15

Replace the outer cover. Fit the tabs on the bottom of the cover in place as shown. Tighten the 3 screws.

Close all panels. Turn the printer back on.

Remettez en place le capot externe. Fixez les pattes situées sous le capot, comme le montre la figure. Revissez les 3 vis.

Fermez tous les panneaux. Mettez de nouveau l’imprimante sous tension.

Äußere Verkleidung anbringen. Dabei die Vorsprünge an der Unterseite der

Verkleidung einstecken (siehe Abbildung). Die drei Schrauben anziehen.

Alle Verkleidungen schließen. Drucker wieder einschalten.

Rimettere a posto il coperchio esterno. Inserire le linguette della parte inferiore del coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Avvitare le 3 viti.

Chiudere tutti i pannelli. Riaccendere la stampante.

Reinstale la cubierta exterior. Introduzca las lengüetas de la parte inferior de la cubierta en su lugar, tal como se muestra. Apriete los 3 tornillos.

Cierre todos los paneles. Vuelva a encender la impresora.

Recoloque a tampa externa. Posicione no lugar as guias na parte inferior da tampa, conforme ilustrado. Aperte os 3 parafusos.

Feche todos os painéis. Religue a impressora.

English

1. Press

On Line

. Press

Menu

.

<TOP MENU>

message is displayed.

2. Press

Next

until

<SERVICE>

appears. Press

Enter

.

3. Press

Next

until

<DISK SERVICES>

is displayed. Press

Enter

.

4. Press

Next

until

<FORMAT DISK>

is displayed.

Press

Enter

.

5.

<ARE YOU SURE?> along with the default choice of <NO>

will be displayed..

6. Press

Next and <YES>

will be displayed. Press

Enter.

7.

WAIT: FORMATTING HARD DISK

is displayed for approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

8. Exit the Disk Services menu and put the printer

ON-LINE.

9. Power the printer OFF and then ON. Verify hard disk information on the startup page.

Deutsch

1.

Online

betätigen. Menü drücken. Es erscheint die

Meldung

<HAUPT-MENÜ>

.

2.

Weiter

betätigen, bis

<SERVICE>

erscheint. Danach die

Eingabe

-Taste betätigen.

3.

Weiter

betätigen, bis

<FESTPLATTEN-SERVICE>

erscheint. Danach die

Eingabe

-Taste betätigen.

4.

Weiter

betätigen, bis

<FESTPLATTE

FORMATIEREN>

erscheint und die

Eingabe

-Taste betätigen.

5. Die Meldung

<SIND SIE SICHER?>

wird zusammen mit der Wahlmöglichkeit

NEIN

angezeigt.

6. Durch Betätigen von

Weiter

erscheint

<JA>

. Danach die

Eingabe

-Taste betätigen.

7.

BITTE WARTEN: FESTPLATTE WIRD

FORMATIERT

erscheint nach ca. 30 - 45 Minuten.

8. Das Menü Festplatten-Service verlassen und den

Drucker ONLINE schalten.

9. Den Drucker AUS- und wieder EINschalten. Die

Festplatten-Informationen auf der Startseite überprüfen.

Formatting the Hard Drive

Formatage du disque dur

Formatieren der Festplatte

Formattazione del Disco rigido

Formateo del disco duro

Formatando o Disco Rígido

Français

1. Appuyer sur

MARCHE

. Appuyer sur

Menu

.

Le message < MENU SUP.>

s’affiche.

2. Appuyer sur

Suivant

jusqu’à ce que

<SERVICE>

apparaisse. Appuyer sur

Entrer.

3. Appuyer sur

Suivant

jusqu’à ce que

< SERVICES

DU DISQUE>

soit affiché. Appuyer sur

Entrer.

4. Appuyer sur

Suivant

jusqu’à ce que

<FORMATAGE DU DISQUE>

soit affiché.

Appuyer sur

Entrer.

5.

<ÊTES-VOUS SÛR(E)?>

ainsi que le choix par défaut

NON

s’affiche.

6. Appuyer sur

Suivant

pour que

<OUI>

s’affiche.

Appuyer sur

Entrer

.

7.

ATTENDRE: FORMATAGE DU DISQUE DUR

s’affiche pendant environ 30 - 45 minutes.

8. Quitter le menu des Services du Disque et mettre l’imprimante en MARCHE.

9. ARRÊT de l’imprimante puis MARCHE. Vérifier les informations du disque dur sur la page de départ.

Italiano

1. Premere

In linea

. Premere

Menu

.

Il messaggio

<MENU BASE>

è visualizzato.

2. Premere

Successivo

fino a che non compaia

<SERVIZIO>

. Premere

Invio.

3. Premere

Successivo

fino a che non sia

visualizzato

<SERVIZI DISCO

>. Premere

Invio.

4. Premere

Successivo

fino a che non sia

visualizzato

<FORMATTA DISCO>.

Premere

Invio

5.

<SIETE SICURI?>

sarà visualizzato insieme alla scelta di default NO.

6. Premere

Successivo

e sarà visualizzato

<SÌ>

.

Premere

Invio

.

7.

ATTENDERE: FORMATTAZ.DISCO RIG

è visualizzato per circa 30 - 45 minuti.

8. Uscire dal menu Servizi del disco e mettere la stampante IN LINEA.

9. Spegnere e quindi riaccendere la stampante. Verificare le informazioni del disco rigido sulla pagina di avvio.

Español

1. Pulse

En línea

. Pulse

Menú

. se muestra el mensaje

<

MENÚ PRINCIPAL>.

2. Pulse

Siguiente

hasta que aparezca

<SERVICIO>.

Pulse

Entrar.

3. Pulse

Siguiente

hasta que se muestre

<SERVIC

DISCO>.

Pulse

Entrar.

4. Pulse

Siguiente

hasta que se muestre

<FORMATEAR DISC>.

Pulse

Entrar.

5. Junto con la opción prefijada

<NO>

se mostrará

<¿ESTA SEGURO?>

.

6. Pulse

Siguiente

y se mostrará

<SÍ>.

Pulse

Entrar

.

7.

ESPERE: FORMATEANDO DISCO DURO

se muestra durante aproximadamente 30 a 45 minutos.

8. Salga del menú Servic disco y ponga la impresora EN

LÍNEA.

9. Apague la impresora y vuélvala a encender. Verifique la información del disco duro en la página inicial.

Português

1. Pressione

On-line

. Pressione

Menu

. A mensagem

<MENU SUPERIOR>

será apresentada.

2. Pressione

Seguinte

até que

<SERVIÇO> seja apresentado. Pressione

Entrar.

3. Pressione

Seguinte

até que

<SERVIÇOS DE

DISCO> seja indicado. Pressione

Entrar.

4. Pressione

Seguinte

até que

<FORMATAR

DISCO>

seja indicado. Pressione

Entrar.

5.

<TEM CERTEZA?>

será apresentado juntamente com a escolha padrão de

NÃO

.

6. Pressionando

Seguinte

, a mensagem

<SIM>

será indicada

.

Pressione

Entrar

.

7.

ESPERE: DISCO RÍGIDO FORMATANDO

é indicado por aproximadamente 30 a 45 minutos.

8. Saia do menu Serviços de Disco e ajuste a impressora para ON-LINE.

9. Desligue a impressora e Ligue-a novamente.

Verifique as informações do disco rígido sobre a página de inicialização.

701P93169

2

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Media Server Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation du Media serveur

Einbauanleitungen - Medienserver

Istruzioni per l’installazione del Media Server

Instrucciones de instalación del servidor de medios

Instruções para instalação do Media Server

SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES

DISPOSITIFS ELECTRONIQUES SENSIBLES

EMPFINDLICHE ELEKTRONIK

DISPOSITIVI ELETTRONICI SENSIBILI

DISPOSITIVOS ELECTRÓNICOS SENSIBLES

DISPOSITIVOS ELETRÔNICOS SENSÍVEIS

Turn the printer off.

Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

Drucker ausschalten.

Spegnere la stampante.

Apague la impresora.

Desligue a impressora.

Release the latches and open the front and back panels.

Débloquez les loquets et ouvrez les panneaux avant et arrière.

Verriegelung lösen und die Vorder- und Rückverkleidung öffnen.

Liberare le chiusure ed aprire i pannelli frontale e posteriore.

Libere los seguros y abra los paneles delantero y posterior.

Solte as travas e abra o painel dianteiro e traseiro.

3

4

5

6

Loosen the two screws on the left side cover, as shown.

Desserez les deux vis du capot latéral gauche, comme le montre la figure.

Die beiden Schrauben von der linken Seitenverkleidung lösen (siehe

Abbildung).

Allentare le due viti del coperchio laterale sinistro, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Afloje los dos tornillos de la cubierta del costado izquierdo tal como se muestra.

Solte os dois parafusos da tampa do lado esquerdo, conforme ilustrado.

Loosen the screw on the back of the left side cover, as shown.

Desserez la vis située sur la partie arrière du capot latéral gauche, comme le montre la figure.

Die Schraube von Rückseite der linken Seitenverkleidung lösen (siehe

Abbildung).

Allentare la vite della parte posteriore del coperchio laterale sinistro, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Afloje el tornillo de la parte posterior de la cubierta del costado izquierdo tal como se muestra.

Solte o parafuso da parte traseira da tampa do lado esquerdo, conforme ilustrado.

Lift the cover out and up to remove it.

Enlevez le capot en le soulevant.

Verkleidung anheben und abnehmen.

Sollevare il coperchio per rimuoverlo.

Levante la cubierta hacia afuera y arriba para retirarla.

Levante e retire a tampa.

Remove and discard the plastic insert from the cover as shown.

Retirez et jetez l’élément en plastique du capot, comme le montre la figure.

Kunststoffeinlage von der Verkleidung abnehmen und wegwerfen (siehe

Abbildung).

Rimuovere ed eliminare l’inserto in plastica dal coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Retire y descarte el inserto plástico de la cubierta tal como se muestra.

Retire e descarte o encaixe plástico da tampa, conforme ilustrado.

7

Loosen the 5 screws on the inner cover, as shown.

Remove the inner cover.

Desserez les 5 vis du capot interne, comme le montre la figure.

Retirez le capot interne.

Die fünf Schrauben von der inneren Abdeckung lösen (siehe Abbildung).

Innere Abdeckung abnehmen.

Allentare le 5 viti del coperchio interno, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Rimuovere il coperchio interno.

Afloje los 5 tornillos de la cubierta interior tal como se muestra.

Retire la cubierta interior.

Solte os 5 parafusos da tampa interna, conforme ilustrado.

Retire a tampa interna.

8

Remove and discard the screw and cover plate, as shown.

Retirez et jetez la vis et la plaque du panneau, comme le montre la figure.

Schraube und Abdeckung entfernen und wegwerfen (siehe Abbildung).

Rimuovere ed eliminare la vite e la piastra del coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Retire y descarte el tornillo y la placa de cubierta tal como se muestra.

Retire e descarte o parafuso e a chapa protetora, conforme ilustrado.

9

10

11

Insert the Media Server, as shown, making sure the smaller wire connector is on top.

Mettez en place le serveur de support, comme le montre la figure, en vous assurant que le plus petit des connecteurs est en haut.

Den Medienserver met dem kleinen Stecker nach oben einsetzen (siehe

Abbildung).

Inserire il media server, come riportato nell’illustrazione, assicurandosi che il connettore a filo più piccolo si trovi in alto.

Inserte el Servidor de medios tal como se muestra, asegurándose de que el conector con el cable más pequeño esté encima.

Insira o Media Server, conforme ilustrado, verificando para que o menor conector de fios esteja na parte de cima.

Fit the hooked tab into the cutout, as shown.

Tighten the screw in the bracket.

Enclenchez la patte recourbée dans l’encoche, comme le montre la figure.

Resserrez la vis du support.

Gebogene Halterung in die Aussparung einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Halterung anschrauben.

Inserire la linguetta ricurva nella fessura, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Avvitare la vite nel supporto.

Introduzca la lengüeta en forma de gancho dentro de la perforación tal como se muestra.

Apriete el tornillo en el soporte.

Encaixe a guia no entalhe, conforme ilustrado.

Aperte o parafuso no suporte.

Attach the wide connector as shown.

Fixez le grand connecteur, comme le montre la figure.

Breiten Stecker einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Collegare il connettore a filo, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Una el conector ancho tal como se muestra.

Coloque o conector de fios, conforme ilustrado.

12

Connect the small connector as shown.

Mettez en place le petit connecteur, comme le montre la figure.

Kleinen Stecker einstecken (siehe Abbildung).

Collegare il connettore piccolo, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Una el conector pequeño tal como se muestra.

Conecte o conector pequeno, conforme ilustrado.

12b

13

Replace the inner cover. Fit the tabs on the bottom of the cover in place as shown. Tighten the 5 screws.

Remettez en place le capot interne. Fixez les pattes situées sous le capot, comme le montre la figure. Revissez les 5 vis.

Innere Abdeckung wieder anbringen. Dabei die Vorsprünge an der Unterseite der Abdeckung exakt ausrichten einstecken (siehe Abbildung). Die fünf

Schrauben festziehen.

Rimettere a posto il coperchio interno. Inserire le linguette della parte inferiore del coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Avvitare le 5 viti.

Reinstale la cubierta interior. Introduzca las lengüetas de la parte inferior de la cubierta en su lugar tal como se muestra. Apriete los 5 tornillos.

Recoloque a tampa interna. Posicione no lugar as guias na parte inferior da tampa, conforme ilustrado. Aperte os 5 parafusos.

14

Replace the outer cover. Fit the tabs on the bottom of the cover in place as shown. Tighten the 3 screws.

Close all panels.

Remettez en place le capot externe. Fixez les pattes situées sous le capot, comme le montre la figure. Revissez les 3 vis.

Fermez tous les panneaux.

Äußere Verkleidung wieder anbringen. Dabei die Vorspünge an der Unterseite der Verkleidung einstecken (siehe Abbildung). Die drei Schrauben anziehen.

Alle Verkleidungen festziehen.

Rimettere a posto il coperchio esterno. Inserire le linguette della parte inferiore del coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Avvitare le 3 viti.

Chiudere tutti i pannelli.

Reinstale la cubierta exterior. Introduzca las lengüetas de la parte inferior de la cubierta en su lugar tal como se muestra. Apriete los 3 tornillos.

Cierre todos los paneles.

Recoloque a tampa externa. Posicione no lugar as guias na parte inferior da tampa. Aperte os 3 parafusos.

Feche todos os painéis.

701P93166

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Adobe PostScript Kit Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation du lot Adobe PostScript

Einbauanleitungen - Adobe Postscript-Kit

Istruzioni per l’installazione del kit Adobe PostScript

Instrucciones de instalación del kit de Adobe PostScript

Instruções para instalação do kit Adobe PostScript

SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES

DISPOSITIFS ELECTRONIQUES SENSIBLES

EMPFINDLICHE ELEKTRONIK

DISPOSITIVI ELETTRONICI SENSIBILI

DISPOSITIVOS ELECTRÓNICOS SENSIBLES

DISPOSITIVOS ELETRÔNICOS SENSÍVEIS

• Turn the printer off.

• Loosen the screws on the pull-out panel, on the back right corner of the printer.

⊗ Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

⊗ Desserez les vis du panneau amovible situé dans la partie arrière droite de l’imprimante.

♣ Drucker ausschalten.

♣ Schrauben an der herausnehmbaren Platine hinten rechts am Drucker lösen.

∇ Spegnere la stampante.

∇ Allentare le viti del pannello estraibile poste nell’angolo posteriore destro della stampante.

♠ Apague la impresora.

♠ Afloje los tornillos del panel extraíble, en la esquina derecha posterior de la impresora.

◊ Desligue a impressora.

◊ Solte os parafusos do painel removível localizado no canto direito traseiro da impressora.

2

4

Pull the silver tabs to remove the panel.

Important! - Place the panel, flat-side down, on a level surface. Orient it so that the front of the panel where the ports are located is facing left.

Tirez sur les pattes argentées pour retirer la carte.

Important ! - Posez le panneau, côté plat en dessous, sur une surface plane.

Orientez-le de manière que la face avant comportant les ports se trouve à votre gauche.

Platine an den silberfarbenen Laschen aus dem Drucker herausziehen.

Wichtig! - Legen Sie die Platine mit der flachen Seite nach unten auf eine ebene Unterlage. Richten Sie die Platine so aus, daß die Vorderseite der Platine, auf der sich die Schnittstellen befinden, nach links zeigt.

Tirare le linguette metalliche per rimuovere il pannello.

Importante! - Collocare il pannello su una superficie piana, con la parte piatta rivolta verso il basso. Orientarlo in modo che la parte anteriore del pannello, su cui si trovano le porte, sia rivolta verso sinistra.

Tire de las lengüetas plateadas para retirar el panel.

¡Importante! – Coloque el panel, apoyado en su lado plano, sobre una superficie nivelada. Oriéntelo de manera que la parte delantera del panel, donde se ubican los puertos, esté mirando hacia la izquierda.

Puxe as guias metálicas para remover o painel.

Importante! Coloque o painel, com o lado plano virado para baixo, em uma superfície lisa horizontal. Posicione-o de forma que a frente do painel, onde as portas estão localizadas, esteja virada para a esquerda.

Locate the single SIMM on the panel, as shown.

Repérez la cartouche mémoire SIMM unique sur la carte, comme le montre la figure.

SIMM-Modul auf der Verkleidung suchen (siehe Abbildung).

Individuare la SIMM sul pannello, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Coloque el SIMM individual en el panel tal como se muestra.

Localize o SIMM único no painel, conforme ilustrado.

Push sideways on the two small, silver clips to release the SIMM.

Discard the SIMM.

Poussez latéralement les deux clips métalliques de blocage pour dégager la cartouche mémoire SIMM.

Retirez la cartouche mémoire SIMM.

Die beiden kleinen, silberfarbenen Klemmen nach außen drücken, um das

SIMM-Modul freizugeben.

SIMM-Modul entsorgen.

Spingere lateralmente i due piccoli fermi metallici per liberare la scheda

SIMM.

Tettare la scheda SIMM.

Empuje hacia los lados los dos pequeños clips plateados para liberar el SIMM.

Descarte el SIMM.

Puxe para os lados os dois pequenos clipes metálicos para liberar o SIMM.

Descarte o SIMM.

5

6

7

Orient the new SIMM with the cutout towards the left.

Tenez la nouvelle cartouche mémoire SIMM de façon que l’encoche soit a gauche.

Das neue SIMM-Modul mit der Aussparung links ausrichten.

Orientare la nuova scheda SIMM in modo che la fessura sia rivolta verso sinistra.

Oriente el nuevo SIMM con la perforación hacia la izquierda.

Posicione o novo SIMM com o entalhe direcionado para a esquerda.

Angle the SIMM away from you, and fit it into the slot.

Tilt the SIMM toward you until it snaps into place.

Inclinez la cartouche mémoire SIMM en l'éloignant de vous et insérez-la dans la rainure.

Ramenez la cartouche mémoire SIMM vers vous jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’enclenche dans son logement.

SIMM-Modul nach hinten drücken und in den Steckplatz einpassen.

SIMM-Modul nach vorne drücken bis es einrastet.

Allontanare da sé la scheda SIMM e inserirla nell’alloggiamento.

Inclinare la scheda SIMM verso di sé fino a che non scatta in posizione.

Incline el SIMM alejándolo de usted e introdúzcalo en la ranura.

Incline el SIMM hacia usted hasta que encaje en su lugar.

Com o SIMM inclinado em direção contrária a você, encaixe-o no entalhe.

Levante o SIMM na sua direção até que ele se encaixe no lugar com um estalido.

Insert the pull-out panel back into the printer.

Important! Make sure the panel is on the tracks as shown. The panel should slide in place easily.

Remettez la carte en place.

Important ! Assurez-vous que la carte a été correctement remi en place, comme le montre la figure. Elle doit pouvoir être remise en place sans difficulté.

Die hesausneharbare Platine wieder in den Drucker schieben.

Wichtig! Achten Sie darauf Sicherstellen, daß die Platine richtig in den

Führungen sitzt (siehe Abbildung). Die Platine sollte sich leicht einschieben lassen.

Inserire di nuovo il pannello estraibile nella stampante.

Importante! Assicurarsi che il pannello sia inserito nelle guide, come riportato nell’illustrazione. Il pannello deve scorrere con facilità.

Inserte el panel extraíble de vuelta en la impresora.

¡Importante! Asegúrese de que el panel esté en los rieles tal como se muestra.

El panel debe deslizarse fácilmente a su posición.

Recoloque o painel removível na impressora.

Importante! Verifique para que o painel esteja nos trilhos, conforme ilustrado.

O painel deve deslizar facilmente ao ser colocado no lugar.

8

Tighten the thumb screws.

Resserrez les vis.

Rändelschrauben festziehen.

Avvitare le viti a testa piatta.

Apriete los tornillos de ajuste manual.

Aperte os parafusos com os dedos.

701P93167

2

1

XEROX

DocuPrint C55

Serial/LocalTalk Card Installation Instructions

Instructions d’installation de la carte LocalTalk

Einbauanleitungen - Serielle LocalTalk-Karte

Istruzioni per l’installazione della scheda seriale LocalTalk

Instrucciones de instalación de la tarjeta LocalTalk y puerta serie

Instruções para instalação da placa LocalTalk e porta serial

SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICES

DISPOSITIFS ELECTRONIQUES SENSIBLES

EMPFINDLICHE ELEKTRONIK

DISPOSITIVI ELETTRONICI SENSIBILI

DISPOSITIVOS ELECTRÓNICOS SENSIBLES

DISPOSITIVOS ELETRÔNICOS SENSÍVEIS

Turn the printer off.

Mettez l’imprimante hors tension.

Drucker ausschalten.

Spegnere la stampante.

Apague la impresora.

Desligue a impressora.

Loosen the screws on the pull-out panel, on the back right corner of the printer.

Pull the silver tabs and slide the panel part way out of the printer.

Dévissez les vis du panneau amovible situé dans la partie arrière droite de l’imprimante. Faites glisser le panneau en tirant sur les pattes argentées.

Schrauben an der herausziehbaren Platine hinten rechts am Drucker lösen.

Platine an den silberfarbenen Laschen ganz aus dem Drucker herausziehen.

Allentare le viti del pannello estraibile poste nell’angolo posteriore destro della stampante. Tirare le linguette metalliche e far scorrere il pannello fuori dalla stampante.

Afloje los tornillos del panel extraíble, en la esquina derecha posterior de la impresora. Tire de las lengüetas plateadas y deslice la parte del panel fuera de la impresora.

Solte os parafusos do painel removível localizado no canto direito na parte posterior da impressora. Puxe a guia metálica e deslize o painel para retirá-lo da impressora.

4

5

6

Remove and discard the screw and cover as shown.

Retirez et jetez la vis et le panneau supérieur, comme le montre la figure.

Schraube und Verkleidung entfernen und Wegwerfen (siehe Abbildung).

Rimuovere ed eliminare la vite ed il coperchio, come riportato nell’illustrazione.

Retire y descarte el tornillo y la cubierta tal como se muestra.

Retire e descarte o parafuso e a tampa, conforme ilustrado.

With the round connector on top, fit the card connectors into the spaces in the panel’s faceplate.

Introduisez les connecteurs de la carte, le connecteur arrondi en haut, dans les emplacements de la plaque avant du panneau.

Karte mit dem runden Stecker nach oben in die Aussparungen an der

Vorderseite der Verkleidung einstecken.

Con il connettore tondo in alto, inserire i connettori della scheda negli spazi della piastra anteriore del pannello.

Con el conector redondo en la parte superior, introduzca los conectores de la tarjeta en los espacios de la placa delantera.

Com o conector redondo na parte de cima, ajuste os conectores do cartão nos espaços da chapa do painel.

Align the bottom connector on the card with the main board’s connector and apply pressure to both sides until the card connector clicks in place.

Alignez le connecteur qui se trouve en bas de la carte sur le connecteur principal de la carte et appuyez des deux côtés jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.

Den unferen Stecker auf der Karte mit dem Stecker der Hauptkarte ausrichten und Druck auf beide Seiten ausüben, bis der Steckverbinder hörbar einrastet.

Allineare il connettore inferiore della scheda con il connettore principale della scheda e premere su entrambe le estremità fino a che il connettore della scheda non scatti in posizione.

Alinee la parte inferior del conector en la tarjeta con el conector de la tarjeta principal y presione a ambos lados hasta que el conector en la tarjeta haga clic en su lugar.

Alinhe o conector que está na parte inferior do cartão com o conector da placa principal e pressione os dois lados até que o conector do cartão se encaixe no lugar com um estalido.

Using the screw provided with the card, secure the card to the faceplate.

Fixez la carte à la plaque avant à l’aide de la vis fournie.

Karte mit anschrauben der beiliegenden Schraube an der Vorderseite befestigen.

Utilizzando la vite fornita con la scheda, fissare quest’ultima alla piastra anteriore.

Utilizando el tornillo proporcionado con la tarjeta, fije la tarjeta en la placa delantera.

Usando o parafuso fornecido com o cartão, prenda-o à chapa.

7

Push the pull-out panel back into the printer and tighten the two thumb screws.

Remettez la carte arrière en place et resserrez les deux vis.

Herausnehmbare Platine wieder in den Drucker einschieben und die beiden

Rändelschrauben anziehen.

Inserire di nuovo il pannello estraibile nella stampante e avvitare le due viti a testa piatta.

Empuje el panel extraíble dentro de la impresora y apriete los dos tornillos de ajuste manual.

Recoloque o painel removível na impressora e aperte os parafusos com os dedos.

701P93164

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Languages